Publication Type

CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

Catalog Numbers 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L36ERM
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required
to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

Allen-Bradley, ArmorBlock, Compact I/O, CompactLogix, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, DriveLogix, FLEX, FLEX I/O, FlexLogix, Kinetix, Logix5000, PanelConnect, PanelView, PLC-5, POINT I/O, POINTBus,
PowerFlex, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLinx, RSLogix, RSNetWorx, SLC, SoftLogix, Stratix 2000, Stratix 6000, Studio 5000, Studio 5000 Automation Engineering & Design Environment, and Studio 5000
Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
 Table of Contents

Preface Studio 5000 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

For More Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Chapter 1
Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Controller CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Install the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mount the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ground the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Install the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connect Power to the Controller (Series B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies. . . . . . 36

Chapter 2
Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Controller CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Install the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Mount the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Ground the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Install the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connect Power to the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies. . . . . . 58

Chapter 3
Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Controller CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Installation Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Install the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Assemble the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Mount the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ground the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connect Power to the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies. . . . . . 78

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 3

Table of Contents

Chapter 4
Complete Software Tasks Required at Set the IP Address of a Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CompactLogix 5370 Controller Use the BOOTP Server to Set the IP Address of the Controller . . 83
Use the DHCP Server to Set the IP Address of the Controller . . . . 89
Installation
Use RSLinx Software to Set the IP Address of the Controller . . . . . 90
Use the Studio 5000 Environment to Set the IP Address of the
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Use the SD Card to Set the IP Address of the Controller. . . . . . . . . 95
Change the IP Address of a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Change the Network IP Address with RSLinx Classic Software. . . 97
Change the Network IP Address with an SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Load the Controller Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Use the ControlFLASH Software to Load Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Use AutoFlash to Load Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Use the Secure Digital Card to Load Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Select the Operating Mode of the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Chapter 5
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers CompactLogix 5370 Control System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Overview Controller Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Support for Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network. . . 120
Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Example System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DeviceNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Chapter 6
Communicate over Networks EtherNet/IP Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Available Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
EtherNet/IP Network Functionality on
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
EtherNet/IP Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Socket Interface with CompactLogix 5370 Controllers . . . . . . . . . 138
MSG Source Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Quality of Service (QoS) and I/O Module Connections . . . . . . . . 142
DeviceNet Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Available Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Power Supply Distance Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Current Capacity in CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems . . 150

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Table of Contents

Chapter 7
Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix Select I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5370 L1 Controllers Connect Field Power to I/O Devices Connected to a CompactLogix
5730 L1 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Embedded I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . 169
Validate I/O Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Set the Number of Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Empty Slots and Removal and Insertion Under Power Situations 171
Estimate Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Module Faults Related to RPI Estimates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Calculate System Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Physical Placement of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Use the Event Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configure I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Common Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network . . 181
Monitor I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Bus Off Detection and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Chapter 8
Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix Select I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5370 L2 Controllers Embedded I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Determine Embedded Module Update Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Channel Update Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Embedded Analog I/O Modules Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Input Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Output Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Configuration Array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Local Expansion Modules - Optional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . 221
Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network. . . . . . . . . . . 222
Validate I/O Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Estimate Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
System Power Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Power Supply Distance Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Configure Local I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Configure Embedded I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Configure Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Common Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network . . 232
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network. . . . . . 236

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 5

Table of Contents

Monitor I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

End Cap Detection and Module Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Chapter 9
Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix Select I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5370 L3 Controllers Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . 244
Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Validate I/O Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Estimate Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Calculate System Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Physical Placement of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Power Supply Distance Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configure I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Common Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network. . . 259
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network . . . . . . 262
Monitor I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
End Cap Detection and Module Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Chapter 10
Develop Applications Elements of a Control Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Task Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Scheduled and Unscheduled Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Extended Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Access Extended Properties in Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Add-On Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Access the Module Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Create the Add-On Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Monitoring Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Monitoring I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Determine if I/O Communication has Timed Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Determine if I/O Communication to a Specific I/O Module has
Timed Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Interrupt the Execution of Logic and Execute the Fault Handler. 284
System Overhead Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Configure the System Overhead Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sample Controller Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Table of Contents

Chapter 11
Develop Integrated Motion over an Motion Axes Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
EtherNet/IP Network Application AXIS_VIRTUAL Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Maximum Number of Position Loop-configured Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Position Loop-configured Drive Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Time Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Configure Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . 293
Enable Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Add a Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Scalability in Applications Using Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP
Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ERM, and 1769-L36ERM Controllers 297
1769-L18ERM-BB1B Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Chapter 12
Use a Secure Digital Card Store or Load a Project with the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Store a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Load a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Appendix A
Troubleshoot the Module Use Logix Designer Application for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fault Type Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Use the CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . 312

Appendix B
Replacement Considerations Product Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Power Supply Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Appendix C
Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 L1, Series A, Controller Power Connection . . . 319
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers CompactLogix 5370 L1, Series A, Controller Field Power to I/O Devices
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Appendix D
History of Changes Changes to the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 7

Table of Contents

Notes:

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Summary of Changes

This manual contains new and updated information. Changes throughout this
revision are marked by change bars, as shown to the right of this paragraph.

Topic Page
Added Replacement Considerations Appendix 315
Added series B information Throughout
document
Added updated Electronic Keying information Throughout the
document
Addition of Series A appendix 319

The CompactLogix 5370 L1, series B, controller redesign occurred to provide an

option to use one external power supply for system power and field side power.

There are differences between the CompactLogix 5370 L1, series A and B,
controllers, which are detailed throughout the sections of this manual, as
identified by change bars. These differences include the following:
• One external power supply is required for system power and field side
power for CompactLogix 5370 L1, series B, controllers
• The label on the side of the controller indicates a CompactLogix 5370 L1,
series A or B, controller
• CompactLogix 5370 L1, series B, controllers use an isolated power supply
• CompactLogix 5370 L1, series B, controllers do not require an safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) class power supply

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 9

Summary of Changes

Notes:

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Preface

This manual describes the necessary tasks to install, configure, program, and
operate a CompactLogix™ 5370 controller. This manual is intended for
automation engineers and control system developers.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers are designed to provide solution for small and
medium-sized applications.

Studio 5000 Environment The Studio 5000 Automation Engineering & Design Environment™ combines
engineering and design elements into a common environment. The first element
in the Studio 5000® environment is the Studio 5000 Logix Designer™ application.
The Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix™ 5000 software.
The Logix Designer continues to be the product to program Logix5000™
controllers for discrete, process, batch, motion, safety, and drive-based solutions.

The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of

Rockwell Automation® engineering design tools and capabilities. It is the one
place for design engineers to develop the elements of their control system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 11

Preface

For More Information These resources contain information about related products from Rockwell
Automation.

Resource Description
1769-SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module User Manual, publication 1769-UM009 Describes how to use the 1769-SDN to back up your CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller.
Compact High-speed Counter Module User Manual, publication 1769-UM006 Describes high-speed counter operation for standalone 1769-HSC when used with L2 and L3
Compact controllers as well as embedded high-speed counters in L2 embedded controllers.
Compact I/O DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions, publication Describes how to install the Compact I/O™ modules.
1769-IN060
Compact I/O Expansion Power Supplies Installation Instructions, publication Describes how to wire the 1769 Compact I/O power supply.
1769-IN028
Compact I/O Modules Installation Instructions, publication 1769-IN088 Describes how to install 1769 Compact I/O modules with any L2 or L3 CompactLogix controller.
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Quick Start, publication IASIMP-QS024 Describes basic tasks to design, install and start a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.
CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Quick Start, publication IASIMP-QS025 Describes basic tasks to design, install and start a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.
CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Quick Start, publication IASIMP-QS023 Describes basic tasks to design, install and start a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system.
CompactLogix Controllers Specifications Technical Data, publication 1769- Provides CompactLogix controller specifications for all CompactLogix controllers.
TD005
CompactLogix System Selection Guide, publication Describes information about products used in a CompactLogix control system to assist you in
1769-SG001 designing a control solution.
Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002 Describes the following concepts that you must consider when designing a control system that
includes an EtherNet/IP network:
• EtherNet/IP overview
• Ethernet infrastructure
• EtherNet/IP protocol
EtherNet/IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, publication ENET- Describes how to use a DLR network topology.
AP005
EtherNet/IP Socket Interface Application Technique, publication ENET-AT002 Describes socket interface applications.
Execution Time and Memory Use for Logix5000 Controller Instructions Assists in estimating the memory use and execution time of programmed logic and in selecting
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM087 among different programming options.
Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique, Describes CIP Sync technology and how to synchronize clocks in the Rockwell Automation
publication IA-AT003 Integrated Architecture™ system.
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User Describes how to configure an Integrated Motion over
Manual, publication MOTION-UM003 EtherNet/IP motion application and to start up that motion solution in a Logix5000 control system.
Kinetix 350 Single-axis EtherNet/IP Servo Drives User Manual, publication Describes how to install, use and troubleshoot Kinetix® 350 drives.
2097-UM002
Kinetix 6200 and Kinetix 6500 Modular Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual, Describes how to install, use and troubleshoot Kinetix 6200 and Kinetix 6500 drives.
publication 2094-UM002
Logix5000 Add-On Instructions Programming Manual, publication 1756- Explains Add-On Instructions and how to use them.
PM010
Logix5000 Controllers and I/O Tag Data Programming Manual, publication Explains procedures for using and organizing I/O data tags.
1756-PM004
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual, publication Guides all user levels in developing projects for Logix5000 controllers and provides links to
1756-PM001 individual guides for information on topics such as import/export, messages, security, and
programming in different languages.
Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication Provides advanced users with guidelines for system optimization and with system information to
1756-RM094 guide system design choices.
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication Provides details about instructions for programming a Logix5000 controller.
1756-RM003
Logix 5000 Controllers Major, Minor, and I/O Faults Programming Manual, Explains major, minor, and I/O faults and the Controller Fault Handler.
publication 1756-PM014
Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instructions Reference Manual, publication Details how to program the controllers for motion applications.
MOTION-RM002

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Preface

Resource Description
Logix5000 Controllers Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, Provides explanations for controller power up and corrupt memory situations.
publication 1756-PM017
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control/Drives Instruction Set Reference Manual, Details how to program the controller for process or drives applications.
publication 1756-RM006
POINT I/O 24V dc Expansion Power Supply Installation Instructions, publication Describes the 1734-EP24DC expansion power supply.
1734-IN058
POINT I/O Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O Modules User Describes how to return a 1734 POINT I/O module to Autobaud.
Manual, publication 1734-UM001
POINT I/O Field Potential Distributor Modules Installation Instructions, Describes the 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power Distributor module.
publication 1734-IN059
PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication Describes how to install, use and troubleshoot PowerFlex® 755 drives.
750COM-UM001
Using Event Tasks with Logix5000 Controllers White Paper, publication LOGIX- Describes event tasks.
WP003
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.

You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. To order paper copies of technical
documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 13

Preface

Notes:

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 1

Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Topic Page
Before You Begin 18
Install the Secure Digital Card 22
Install the System 24
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable 35
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network 36

ATTENTION: Environment and Enclosure

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined
in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated
disturbances.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those
specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from
accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame,
complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if nonmetallic. The interior of the enclosure must be
accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific
enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 15

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B,
I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs
When combining products within a system, the most adverse produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé
determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les
of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
been removed or the area is known to be l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
nonhazardous. de débrancher l'équipement.
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
unless power has been removed or the area is l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connections that mate to this equipment by using connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à
screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs
other means provided with this product. filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit.
• Substitution of components may impair suitability • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet
for Class I, Division 2. équipement inadapté à une utilisation en
• If this product contains batteries, they must only environnement de Classe I, Division 2.
be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. • S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non
dangereux avant de changer les piles.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when
applied in Zone 2 environments.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not open when energized." After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these
guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 17

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Before You Begin The CompactLogix 5370 L1, series B, controller redesign occurred to provide an
option to use one external power supply for system power and field side power.

There are differences between the CompactLogix 5370 L1, series A and B,
controllers, which are detailed throughout the sections of this manual.

Consider the following before installing a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller:

ATTENTION: If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the

manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment can be impaired.

• The control system includes the controller, an embedded power supply,

and embedded I/O points.

Removable Connector for

Embedded Power Supply

Embedded I/O Module

• The embedded power supply for the series A L1 controller is a 24V DC

nominal, non-isolated power supply with an input range of 10…28.8V
DC. You wire the embedded power supply via a removable connector.

• The embedded power supply for the series B L1 controller is a 24V DC

nominal, isolated power supply with an input range of 10…28.8V DC. You
wire the embedded power supply via a removable connector.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

IMPORTANT You must use a dedicated external Class 2/SELV-approved power

supply to provide power to the system, according to needs of the
application, and within the operating voltage range of the controller
for only series A L1 controllers.
The external power supply that provides power to the embedded
power supply of the controller cannot be used to provide power to any
other components or devices in the application for only series A L1
controllers.

• A second, fused external power supply must be used to provide power to

other components for only series A L1 controllers (see Appendix C).

• Power for other components can be provided from the external power
supply that is used to provide power to the system for only series B L1
controllers.

• The controller has 16 embedded digital input points and 16 embedded

digital output points. You wire the input and output points via a removable
connector.

• The controller supports the use of a limited number of

1734 POINT I/O modules on the POINTBus backplane as local
expansion modules.

IMPORTANT You must use the latest series and firmware revision for all 1734
POINT I/O modules in the local expansion slots to make sure that your
application operates as expected. Use of an older firmware revision
renders the entire 1734 bus inoperable.

The following table lists local expansion module support by controller

catalog number.
Table 1 - Local Expansion Module Support for CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers
Cat. No. 1734 POINT I/O Modules Supported, max
1769-L16ER-BB1B 6
1769-L18ER-BB1B 8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B

See Chapter 7 for further information about the I/O modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 19

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

ATTENTION: Do not discard the end cap. Use this end cap to cover the
exposed interconnections on the last mounting base on the DIN rail.
Failure to do so could result in equipment damage or injury from
electric shock.
For more information on how to terminate the end of your system, see
page 28.

1734 POINT I/O modules support removal and insertion under power.

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Parts

These parts are included in the box when you order your controller:
• Controller - Specific catalog number varies by order

• 1784-SD1 Secure Digital (SD) card with 1 GB of memory storage

A 1784-SD2 SD card with 2 GB of memory storage, or more 1784-SD1

SD cards, are also available if you need extra memory.

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of nonvolatile media is dependent on the number

of write cycles that are performed. Nonvolatile media use a wear
leveling technique or technology for prolonging the service life, but
avoid frequent writes.
Avoid frequent writes when logging data. We recommend that you log
data to a buffer in the memory of your controller and limit the number
of times data is written to removable media.

• An end cap protective cover that slides onto the right side of the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Installation Summary To install a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller, follow these steps.

1. Install the Secure Digital Card.

2. Install the System.
3. Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable.
4. Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 21

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Install the Secure The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller is shipped from the factory with the
1784-SD1 SD card installed.
Digital Card
Complete these steps to reinstall an SD card that has been removed from the
controller back into the controller or to install a new SD card into the controller.

It is recommended that you leave the SD card in the controller, even when it is
not used. If the controller experiences a Major Non-recoverable Fault, extended
fault information is saved to the card.

WARNING: When you insert or remove the SD card while power is on, an
electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

1. Verify that the SD card is locked or unlocked according to your preference.

Consider the following when deciding to lock the card before installation:
– If the card is unlocked, the controller can write data to it or read data
from it.

Unlocked Locked

2. Open the door for the SD card.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

3. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

You can install the SD card in only one orientation. The beveled corner is
at the top.

If you feel resistance when inserting the SD card, pull it out and change the
orientation.

4. Gently press the card until it clicks into place.

5. Close the SD card door.

We recommend that you keep the SD card door closed during normal
system operation. For more information on using the SD card, see Use a
Secure Digital Card on page 301.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 23

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Install the System Complete the following steps to install the CompactLogix 5370 L1
control system.
• Mount the System
• Ground the System
• Install the Controller
• Connect Power to the Controller (Series B)

Mount the System

You mount a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system on a DIN rail. Before you
complete the steps that are required to install the system, install a DIN rail.

WARNING: When used in a Class I, Division 2, hazardous location, this

equipment must be mounted in a suitable enclosure with proper wiring
method that complies with the governing electrical codes.

Before you mount a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system, consider

the following requirements:
• Available DIN Rails
• Minimum Spacing
• System Dimensions

Available DIN Rails

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc-plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

You can mount the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller on the following

DIN rails:
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

IMPORTANT You must install bumpers on the back of your CompactLogix 5370 L1
controller before mounting it on the EN 50022 - 35 x 15 mm
(1.38 x 0.59 in.) DIN rail.
Bumper Selection:
• For more information on Bumper Selection, see Rockwell
Automation Knowledgebase article #591565, 5370 L16ER/L18ER
recommended Bumpers for use with 1.38 x 0.59 in. DIN rail. You
can access the article at: (Login required)
https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/

Minimum Spacing

Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, and adjacent equipment. Allow
50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides, as shown. This spacing provides ventilation
and electrical isolation.

50 mm
Top (2 in.)

50 mm 50 mm
1734 POINT I/O Module
1734 POINT I/O Module

1734 POINT I/O Module

Supply and I/O Module
CompactLogix 5370 L1

(2 in.) (2 in.)
Embedded Power
Controller with

End Cap
Side Side

Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 25

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

System Dimensions

This graphic shows the system dimensions.

105 mm 100.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (3.94 in.)

130.00 mm
(5.11 in.)

144.00 mm
(5.67 in.)

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

This graphic shows the system dimensions with Expansion I/O modules
installed.
12.00 mm
(0.47 in.)
105 mm 100.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (3.94 in.)

130.00 mm
(5.11 in.)

144.00 mm
(5.67 in.)

Ground the System

ATTENTION: This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded

mounting surface such as a metal panel. Additional grounding connections
from the power supply's mounting tabs or DIN rail (if used) are not required
unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.
See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell
Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional information.

Install the Controller

Complete these steps to install the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 27

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

1. Pull out the locking tabs.

2. Slide the controller into position on the DIN rail and push the locking
tabs in.

3. If you are not using local expansion modules, use the tongue-and-groove
slots on the right side of the controller to slide a protective covering onto
the controller. The protective cover ships with the controller.

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

The covering covers the exposed interconnections on the right side of the
controller. Failure to use a protective covering can result in equipment
damage or injury from electric shock.

If you are using local expansion modules, see Local Expansion Modules on
page 166 for more information on how to install them in a
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 29

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Connect Power to the Controller (Series B)

For information to connect power to a series A L1 controller, see Appendix C.

IMPORTANT This section describes how to power the controller via the VDC+ and VDC-
terminals.
Connections to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals do not provide power to input or
output devices that are connected to the embedded I/O modules of the
controller or local expansion modules. Power must be connected to the FP+
and FP- terminals to provide power to input or output devices that are
connected to the embedded I/O modules of the controller or local expansion
modules.
The external power supply can be used to power both the VDC+/- and FP+/-
terminals on the series B L1 controller, see page 152.
For more information on how to provide power to input or output devices that
are connected to the embedded I/O modules of the controller and local
expansion modules, see page 152.

WARNING: Do not connect directly to line voltage. Line voltage must be

supplied by a suitable, approved isolating transformer or power supply having
short circuit capacity not exceeding 100VA maximum or equivalent. The
controller power requirement is 30VA.

Power is connected to the controller via a removable connector that is connected

to the front of the controller. The following graphic shows the connector.

IMPORTANT The controller is grounded once it is installed on a DIN rail as described in

Mount the System on page 24.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect an external 24V DC power source

to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

For information on how to provide field power to input and output

devices that are connected to the embedded I/O modules of the controller
and local expansion modules via the removable connector, see page 152.

• Use a power source that most effectively meets your application needs.
That is, calculate The power requiremetns for your application before
choosing a power source to avoid using a power source that far exceeds
your application requirements.

• This section assumes that any DIN rail you use has been grounded
following Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
publication 1770-4.1.

• The embedded power supply of the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller

provides power to the controller and POINTBus backplane.

• Not all Class 2/SELV-listed power supplies are certified for use in all
applications, for example, use in nonhazardous and hazardous
environments.

Before installing an external power supply, consult all specification and

certification information to verify that you are using an acceptable external
power supply.

• Only for example purposes, this section describes how to use a 1606-
XLE120E, NEC Class 2 switched-mode power supply. The exact steps for
other external power supplies can vary from the steps that are described
here.

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

1. Verify that the external 24V DC power source is not powered.

2. Mount the external 24V DC power source on a DIN rail.

The external 24V DC power source can be installed on the same DIN rail
as the controller or a separate DIN rail.

3. Connect wires to the 24V DC+ and 24V DC- connections on the external
24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 31

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

4. Pull the removable connector off the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

5. Connect the wire that is connected to the 24V DC+ terminal on the
external 24V DC power source to the VDC+ terminal, that is, the top
terminal, on the removable connector.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

6. Connect the wire that is connected to the 24V DC- terminal on the
external 24V DC power source to the VDC- terminal, that is, the terminal
that is second from the top, on the removable connector.

IMPORTANT If your application requires a power control device, for example, a

switch or relay, between the external 24V DC power source and the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller to control when the controller is
powered, you must install the power control device at the VDC+
terminal on the removable connector.
If you install the power control device at the VDC- terminal, the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller can have problems powering up or
powering down properly.

7. Plug the removable connector back into the controller.

8. Secure the removable connector in place.

9. Turn on power to the external 24V DC power source.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 33

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

The following graphic shows an external 24V DC power source that is connected
to a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

Connect to the Controller via The controller has a USB port that uses a Type B receptacle. The port is USB
2.0-compatible and operates at 12 Mbps.
a USB Cable
Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the USB port. With this
connection, you can upgrade firmware and download programs to the controller
directly from your computer.

ATTENTION: The USB port is intended only for temporary local

programming purposes and not intended for permanent connection.
The USB cable is not to exceed 3.0 m (9.84 ft) and must not contain hubs.

WARNING: Do not use the USB port in hazardous locations.

Plug the USB cable into the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 35

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Connect the Controller to an WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communication cable with
EtherNet/IP Network power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc
can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

Connect the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable to one of the Ethernet ports
on the controller. The ports are on the bottom of the controller.
Bottom of Controller
Port 1 - Front

Port 2 - Back

IMPORTANT This example shows how to connect the controller to the network through one
port. Depending on the network topology of your application, you can connect
both ports of the controller to the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on EtherNet/IP network topologies, see page 132.

Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers have embedded switch technology and two

EtherNet/IP ports that let you use it in various EtherNet/IP network topologies:
• Device-level ring network topology - Both ports on the controller are
connected to the network.
• Linear network topology - Both ports on the controller are connected to
the network.
• Star network topology - One port on the controller is connected to
the network.

There are connection and configuration requirements for each EtherNet/IP

network topology.

For more information, see EtherNet/IP Network Topologies on page 132.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 2

Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Topic Page
Before You Begin 40
Install the Secure Digital Card 42
Install the System 44
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable 57
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network 58

ATTENTION: Environment and Enclosure

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined
in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated
disturbances.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those
specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from
accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame,
complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if nonmetallic. The interior of the enclosure must be
accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific
enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 37

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B,
I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs
When combining products within a system, the most adverse produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé
determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les
of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
been removed or the area is known to be l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
nonhazardous. de débrancher l'équipement.
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
unless power has been removed or the area is l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connections that mate to this equipment by using connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à
screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs
other means provided with this product. filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit.
• Substitution of components may impair suitability • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet
for Class I, Division 2. équipement inadapté à une utilisation en
• If this product contains batteries, they must only environnement de Classe I, Division 2.
be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. • S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non
dangereux avant de changer les piles.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when
applied in Zone 2 environments.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not open when energized." After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these
guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 39

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Before You Begin Consider the following before installing a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller:

• The control system includes a controller, an embedded power supply,

embedded I/O points, and a 1769-ECR right end cap.

• The embedded power supply is a 24V DC input, isolated power supply

The following graphic shows an example CompactLogix 5370 L2

controller.
End Cap
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B Control System

Embedded I/O Modules

Embedded Power
Supply Terminals

ATTENTION: You must use an external power supply that is Class 2 or

SELV-listed for series A L1 controllers.

For example, you can use a 1606-XLSDNET4, standard switched-mode

power supply, as shown in this chapter.

• The controllers have embedded I/O points. You wire the input and output
points via a removable connector.

• The controller supports the use of up to four Compact I/O modules on

the local 1769 CompactBus backplane as local expansion modules.

For more information on using embedded I/O points and local

expansion modules, see Chapter 8, Use I/O Modules with
CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers on page 189.

• You must terminate the end of the CompactBus via a 1769-ECR right end
cap as shown in step 6 on page 52.

• You cannot remove nor install Compact I/O modules while the controller
is powered.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

ATTENTION: CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems do not support

removal and insertion under power (RIUP). Removing a 1769 Compact
I/O module or end cap generates a controller fault and may also result in
damage to system components.

CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Parts

These parts are included in the box when you order your controller:
• Controller - Specific catalog number varies by order

• 1769-ECR Compact I/O End Cap/Terminator

• 1784-SD1 Secure Digital (SD) card with 1 GB of memory storage

A 1784-SD2 SD card with 2 GB of memory storage, or more1784-SD1

SD cards, are also available if you need extra memory.

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of nonvolatile media is dependent on the number

of write cycles that are performed. Nonvolatile media use a wear
leveling technique or technology for prolonging the service life, but
avoid frequent writes.
Avoid frequent writes when logging data. We recommend that you log
data to a buffer in the memory of your controller and limit the number
of times data is written to removable media.

Installation Summary To install a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller, follow these steps.

1. Install the Secure Digital Card.

2. Install the System.
3. Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable.
4. Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 41

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Install the Secure The CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller is shipped from the factory with the
1784-SD1 SD card installed.
Digital Card
Complete these steps to reinstall an SD card that has been removed from the
controller back into the controller or to install a new SD card into the controller.

It is recommended that you leave the SD card in the controller, even when it is
not used. If the controller experiences a Major Non-recoverable Fault, extended
fault information is saved to the card.

WARNING: When you insert or remove the SD card while power is on, an
electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

1. Verify that the SD card is locked or unlocked according to your preference.

Consider the following when deciding to lock the card before installation:
– If the card is unlocked, the controller can write data to it or read data
from it.

Unlocked Locked

2. Open the door for the SD card.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

3. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

You can install the SD card in one orientation only. The beveled corner is
at the bottom.

If you feel resistance when inserting the SD card, pull it out and change the
orientation.

4. Gently press the card until it clicks into place.

5. Close the SD card door.

We recommend that you keep the SD card door closed during normal
system operation. For more information on using the SD card, see Use a
Secure Digital Card on page 301.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 43

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Install the System Complete the following tasks to install the CompactLogix 5370 L2
control system:
• Mount the System
• Ground the System
• Install the Controller
• Connect Power to the Control System

Mount the System

You can mount a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system on a DIN rail or

a panel.

WARNING: When used in a Class I, Division 2, hazardous location, this

equipment must be mounted in a suitable enclosure with proper wiring
method that complies with the governing electrical codes.

Before you mount a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, consider

the following requirements:
• Available DIN Rails
• Minimum Spacing
• System Dimensions

Available DIN Rails

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc-plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

You can mount the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller on the following

DIN rails:
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Minimum Spacing

Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, and adjacent equipment. Allow
50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides, as shown. This spacing provides ventilation
and electrical isolation.

50 mm
Top (2 in.)

50 mm 50 mm

CompactLogix 5370 L2

Supply and I/O Points

(2 in.) (2 in.)

Embedded Power

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module
Controller with

End Cap
Side Side

Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

System Dimensions

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L24ER-QB1B controller.
27.65 mm
3.06 mm 59.70 mm
(1.09 in.)
(0.12 in.) (2.35 in.)
105 mm
(4.13 in.)

118.00 mm
(4.65 in.)

2.8 mm 115.00 mm
(0.12 in.) (4.53 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 45

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller
with expansion modules installed.

35.00 mm 25.00 mm 18.00 mm

(1.38 in.) (0.98 in.) (0.71 in.)
105 mm 115.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (4.53 in.)

118.00 mm 126.6 mm
(4.65 in.) (4.98 in.)

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L24ER-QBFC1B controller.

3.06 mm 84.70 mm 27.65 mm

(0.12 in.) (3.33 in.) (1.09 in.)
105 mm
(4.13 in.)

118.00 mm
(4.65 in.)

2.8 mm 140.00 mm
(0.12 in.) (5.51 in.)

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B

controller with expansion modules installed.
35.00 mm
(1.38 in.) 25.00 mm
140.00 mm (0.98 in.)
105 mm
(4.13 in.) (5.51 in.)

126.6 mm
118.00 mm (4.98 in.)
(4.65 in.)

18.00 mm
(0.71 in.)

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

3.06 mm 84.70 mm 27.65 mm

(0.12 in.) (3.33 in.) (1.09 in.)
105 mm
(4.13 in.)

118.00 mm
(4.65 in.)

2.8 mm 140.00 mm
(0.12 in.) (5.51 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 47

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller with expansion modules installed.
35.00 mm
(1.38 in.) 25.00 mm
(0.98 in.)
105 mm 140.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (5.51 in.)

118.00 mm 126.6 mm
(4.65 in.) (4.98 in.)

18.00 mm
(0.71 in.)

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Mount the Controller on a Panel

Use two M4 or #8 pan head screws to mount the controller. Mounting screws are
required on every module. Use this procedure to use the assembled modules as a
template for drilling holes in the panel.

IMPORTANT Due to module mounting hole tolerance, it is important to follow these

procedures.

1. On a clean work surface, assemble no more than three modules.

2. Using the assembled modules as a template, carefully mark the center of all
module-mounting holes on the panel.
3. Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface, including any
previously mounted modules.
4. Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or #8 screw.
5. Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment.

TIP The grounding plate, that is, where you install the mounting screws,
grounds the module when it is panel-mounted.

6. Use the mounting screws to attach the modules to the panel.

TIP If you are mounting more modules, mount only the last one of this group
and put the others aside. This reduces remounting time when you are
drilling and tapping the next group of modules.
7. Repeat steps 1…6 for any remaining modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 49

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Mount the Controller on the DIN Rail

You can mount the controller on the following DIN rails:

• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

1. )Hook the DIN rail latch at the top of the back of the controller on the
DIN rail.
2. Swing the controller downward until it touches the DIN rail and press the
controller against the DIN rail until it clicks in place.

Ground the System

ATTENTION: This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded

mounting surface such as a metal panel. Additional grounding connections
from the power supply's mounting tabs or DIN rail (if used) are not required
unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.
See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell
Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional information.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Install the Controller

Complete these steps to install the controller.

1. Pull out the bottom locking tabs.

2. Hook the top of the controller on the DIN rail.

3. Swing it downward until the controller is flush against the DIN rail and
push it down against the DIN rail.
4. Push the controller against the DIN rail.
5. Push the locking tabs in.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 51

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

6. If you are not using local expansion modules, slide the 1769-ECR end cap
onto the right side of the controller.

IMPORTANT You must install an end cap onto the right side of the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller system either at the end of the
controller or at the end of any local expansion modules that can be
installed onto the controller.

7. Push the end cap locking mechanism to the right to lock it onto
the controller.

If you are using local expansion modules, see Local Expansion Modules -
Optional on page 220 for more information on how to install them in a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Connect Power to the Control System

You must connect an external Class 2 or SELV-listed power supply to the

embedded power supply of the controller. The external power supply converts
115/230V AC power to 24V DC.

WARNING: Do not connect directly to line voltage. Line voltage must be

supplied by a suitable, approved isolating transformer or power supply having
short circuit capacity not exceeding 100VA maximum or equivalent.

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect power only to the embedded power
supply of the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

For information on how to wire the embedded I/O module available on

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, see Embedded I/O Modules on
page 190.

• Not all Class 2 or SELV-listed power supplies are certified for use in all
applications, for example, use in nonhazardous and hazardous
environments.

Before installing an external power supply, consult all specification and

certification information to verify that you are using an acceptable external
power supply.

• This section describes how to wire terminals +24VDC and COM on the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller. They are the only terminals you wire
to power the CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

Use only the FG terminal when connecting a field device to the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 53

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

For example purposes, this section uses a 1606-XLDNET4, standard switched-

mode power supply.

IMPORTANT The 1606-XLDNET4 power supply is not certified for use in all applications, for
example, you cannot use it in hazardous locations. Read the points in Connect
Power to the Control System on page 53 before choosing the external power
supply for your application.

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L2

control system.

1. Verify that the external 24V DC power source is not powered.

2. Mount the external 24V DC power source on a DIN rail.

The external 24V DC power source can be installed on the same DIN rail
as the controller or a separate DIN rail.

3. Connect wires to the 24V DC+ and 24V DC- connections on the external
24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

4. Strip 8 mm (0.31 in) insulation from the end of the wire that you connect
to the +24VDC terminal on the controller.

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

5. Connect the wire from the 24VDC+ terminal on the external 24V DC
power source to the +24VDC terminal on the controller.

6. Strip 8 mm (0.31 in) insulation from the end of the wire that you connect
to the COM terminal on the controller.
7. Connect the wire from the 24V DC- terminal on the external 24V DC
power source to the COM terminal on the controller.

IMPORTANT If your application requires a power control device, for example, a switch or
relay, between the external power supply and the embedded power supply of
the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller to control when the controller is powered,
you must install the power control device at the +24V DC terminal on the
controller.
If you install the power control device at the COM terminal, the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller cannot power up or power down properly.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 55

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

The following graphic shows an external 24V DC power source that is connected
to a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

IMPORTANT When you remove power from the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller to cycle
power, the OK status indicator of the controller remains lit briefly as the
controller passes through its shutdown sequence.
Do not reapply power from the external power supply to the embedded power
supply of the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller until after the OK status
indicator of the controller is off.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Connect to the Controller via The controller has a USB port that uses a Type B receptacle. The port is USB
2.0-compatible and operates at 12 Mbps.
a USB Cable
Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the USB port. With this
connection, you can upgrade firmware and download programs to the controller
directly from your computer.

ATTENTION: The USB port is intended only for temporary local

programming purposes and not intended for permanent connection.
The USB cable is not to exceed 3.0 m (9.84 ft) and must not contain hubs.

WARNING: Do not use the USB port in hazardous locations.

Plug the USB cable into the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 57

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Connect the Controller to an WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communication cable with
EtherNet/IP Network power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc
can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

Connect the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable to one of the Ethernet ports
on the controller. The ports are on the bottom of the controller.

ATTENTION: Do not plug a DH-485 network cable or a NAP cable into the
Ethernet port. Undesirable behavior and/or damage to the port can result.

Bottom of Controller

Port 1 - Front
Port 2 - Back

IMPORTANT This example shows how to connect the controller to the network through one
port. Depending on the network topology of your application, you can connect
both ports of the controller to the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on EtherNet/IP network topologies, see page 132.

Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers have embedded switch technology and two

EtherNet/IP ports that let you use it in various EtherNet/IP network topologies:
• Device-level ring network topology - Both ports on the controller are
connected to the network.
• Linear network topology - Both ports on the controller are connected to
the network.
• Star network topology - One port on the controller is connected to
the network.

There are connection and configuration requirements for each EtherNet/IP

network topology.

For more information, see EtherNet/IP Network Topologies on page 132.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 3

Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Topic Page
Before You Begin 62
Install the Secure Digital Card 65
Install the System 67
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable 76
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network 77

ATTENTION: Environment and Enclosure

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined
in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated
disturbances.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those
specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from
accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame,
complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if nonmetallic. The interior of the enclosure must be
accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific
enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 59

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B,
I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs
When combining products within a system, the most adverse produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé
determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les
of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
been removed or the area is known to be l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
nonhazardous. de débrancher l'équipement.
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
unless power has been removed or the area is l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connections that mate to this equipment by using connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à
screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs
other means provided with this product. filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit.
• Substitution of components may impair suitability • La substitution de composants peut rendre cet
for Class I, Division 2. équipement inadapté à une utilisation en
• If this product contains batteries, they must only environnement de Classe I, Division 2.
be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. • S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non
dangereux avant de changer les piles.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when
applied in Zone 2 environments.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not open when energized." After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these
guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 61

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Before You Begin Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system:

• The controller is the leftmost device in the system.

• Only one controller can be used on a local 1769 CompactBus. The

controller supports the local bank and up to two more banks.

• The controller has a power supply distance rating of four. This rating
means that the controller must be within four slots of the power supply.
You can install as many as three modules between the power supply and
the controller, as shown in the following graphic.

1769-L33ERM Compact I/O Power Supply End Cap

• The controllers support this many local expansion modules across multiple
I/O banks.

Cat. No. Local Expansion Modules Supported, max

1769- L30ER 8
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 16
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 30

• Each I/O bank requires its own power supply.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

• You must terminate the end of the last bank in a CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system. You can terminate a bank at the left or right end of the
bank dependent upon your system design.

A 1769-ECx end cap is required to terminate the end of the last bank in
the control system.

For example, if a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system uses one bank,

you must use a 1769-ECR right end cap to terminate the right end of the
bank.

For graphics of CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems that use one bank
or multiple banks, see Mount the System on page 70.

ATTENTION: The CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems do not support

removal and insertion under power (RIUP). These events occur while the
CompactLogix system is under power:
• Any break in the connection between the power supply and the
controller, for example, removing the power supply, controller, or an I/O
module, can subject the logic circuitry to transient conditions above the
normal design thresholds and can result in damage to system
components or unexpected behavior.
• Removing an end cap or an I/O module faults the controller and can
also result in damage to system components.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 63

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Parts

These parts are included in the box when you order your controller:
• Controller - Specific catalog number varies by order

• 1784-SD1 Secure Digital (SD) card with 1 GB of memory storage

A 1784-SD2 SD card with 2 GB of memory storage, or more 1784-SD1

SD cards, are also available if you need more memory.

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of nonvolatile media is dependent on the number

of write cycles that are performed. Nonvolatile media use a wear
leveling technique or technology for prolonging the service life, but
avoid frequent writes.
Avoid frequent writes when logging data. We recommend that you log
data to a buffer in the memory of your controller and limit the number
of times data is written to removable media.

Installation Summary To install a CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller, follow these steps.

• Install the Secure Digital Card
• Install the System
• Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable.
• Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Install the Secure The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers ship from the factory with the
1784-SD1 SD card installed.
Digital Card
Complete these steps to reinstall an SD card that has been removed from the
controller back into the controller or to install a new SD card into the controller.

It is recommended that you leave the SD card in the controller, even when it is
not used. If the controller experiences a Major Non-recoverable Fault, extended
fault information is saved to the card.

WARNING: When you insert or remove the Secure Digital (SD) Card while
power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in
hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

1. Verify that the SD card is locked or unlocked according to your preference.

Consider the following when deciding to lock the card before installation:
– If the card is unlocked, the controller can write data to it or read data
from it.

Unlocked Locked

2. Open the door for the SD card.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 65

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

3. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

You can install the SD card in only one orientation. The beveled corner is
at the top. An orientation logo is printed on the card.

If you feel resistance when inserting the SD card, pull it out and change the
orientation.

4. Gently press the card until it clicks into place.

5. Close the SD card door.

We recommend that you keep the SD card door closed during normal system
operation. For more information on using the SD card, see Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Install the System Complete the following steps to install the CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system.
• Assemble the System
• Mount the System
• Ground the System
• Connect Power to the Control System

Assemble the System

You can attach an adjacent Compact I/O module or 1769 Compact I/O power
supply to a CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller before or after mounting. For
mounting instructions, see Ground the System on page 73 or Mount the
Controller on a Panel on page 73.

ATTENTION: Do not remove or replace this module while power is applied.

Interruption of the backplane can result in unintentional operation or
machine motion.

WARNING: Remove power before removing or inserting this module. If you

insert or remove the module while backplane power is on, an electrical arc can
occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

This section describes how to assemble a local bank.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 67

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Complete these steps to install the controller. This example describes how to
attach a 1769 Compact I/O power supply to the controller.

1. Verify that line power is disconnected.

2. Make sure that the bus lever of the 1769 Compact I/O power supply is in
the unlocked position, that is, leaning to the right.

3. Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots to secure the controller
and power supply together.

Tongue-and-groove Slots

4. Move the power supply back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the
bus connectors align with each other.
5. Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the bus lever of the power
supply back slightly to clear the positioning tab.

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

6. Move the bus lever of the power supply fully to the left until it clicks;
making sure that it locks.

7. If your system does not use any local expansion modules, use the tongue-
and-groove slots described earlier to attach a 1769-ECR Compact I/O end
cap terminator to the last module in the system.

IMPORTANT You must install an end cap onto the right side of the
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller system either at the end of the
controller or at the end of any local expansion modules that can be
installed onto the controller.

8. Wire the 1769 Compact I/O power supply according to the directions in
the Compact I/O Expansion Power Supplies installation instructions,
publication 1769-IN028.

If you are using local expansion modules, see Local Expansion Modules on
page 242.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 69

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Mount the System

You can mount a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system on a DIN rail or on

a panel.

ATTENTION: During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices, be sure that all
debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the
controller. Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the
controller is energized.

A CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system must be mounted so that the modules

are horizontal to each other. If you separate modules into multiple banks, the
banks can be vertical or horizontal to each other.

Figure 1 shows example systems with local expansion modules included.

Figure 1 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

Horizontal Orientation

Bank 1 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 2 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 3

Bank 1

1769-CRRx Cable
Vertical Orientation

Bank 2

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Before you mount a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system, consider

the following:
• Minimum Spacing
• System Dimensions
• Power Supply Distance Rating

Minimum Spacing

Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, and adjacent equipment. Allow
50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides, as shown. This spacing provides ventilation
and electrical isolation.

Top 50 mm
(2 in.)

CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

50 mm 50 mm

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module

(2 in.) (2 in.)

Power Supply

End Cap
Side Side

Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 71

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

System Dimensions

This graphic shows the system dimensions.

18 mm
(0.71 in.)
55 mm 70 mm 35 mm
(2.17 in.) (2.76 in.) (1.38 in.)

132 mm
(5.20 in.)
118 mm
(4.65 in.)

52.5 mm 35 mm 35 mm 35 mm 35 mm
(2.07 in.) (1.38 in.) (1.38 in.) (1.38 in.) (1.38 in.)

105 mm
(4.13 in.)

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers and the Compact I/O modules have power
supply distance ratings. Power supply distance ratings determine how many slots
in a bank that a device can be from the power supply.

For example, a product with a power supply distance rating of four can only have
up to three slots between it and the power supply.

Device Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller
4
1769 Compact I/O DeviceNet scanner
Compact I/O module 4…8, depending on module
For more information about the power supply distance
rating for a Compact I/O module, see CompactLogix
Selection Guide, publication 1769-SG001

CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers must be the leftmost device in the control

system, and the system only enables up to three modules between the controller
and the power supply. This graphic shows an example configuration.

Bank 1 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 2

Ground the System

ATTENTION: This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded

mounting surface such as a metal panel. Additional grounding connections
from the power supply's mounting tabs or DIN rail (if used) are not required
unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.
See Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell
Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional information.

For more information, see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding
Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1.

Mount the Controller on a Panel

Use two M4 or #8 pan head screws to mount the controller. Mounting screws are
required on many modules. Use this procedure to use the assembled modules as a
template for drilling holes in the panel.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 73

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

IMPORTANT Due to module mounting hole tolerance, it is important to follow these

procedures.

1. On a clean work surface, assemble no more than three modules.

2. Using the assembled modules as a template, carefully mark the center of all
module-mounting holes on the panel.
3. Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface, including any
previously mounted modules.
4. Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or #8 screw.
5. Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment.

TIP The grounding plate, that is, where you install the mounting screws,
grounds the module when it is panel-mounted.

6. Use the mounting screws to attach the modules to the panel.

TIP If you are mounting more modules, mount only the last one of this group
and put the others aside. This reduces remounting time when you are
drilling and tapping the next group of modules.
7. Repeat steps 1…6 for any remaining modules.

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Mount the Controller on the DIN Rail

You can mount the controller on the following DIN rails:

• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

1. Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail, close the DIN rail latches of
the controller.
2. Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail.

The latches momentarily open and lock into place.

Connect Power to the Control System

Connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system that is based on

the 1769 Compact I/O power supply your application uses. For more
information on connecting power to your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control
system, see the Compact I/O Expansion Power Supplies Installation Instructions,
publication 1769-IN028.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 75

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Connect to the Controller The controller has a USB port that uses a Type B receptacle. The port is USB
2.0-compatible and operates at 12 Mbps.
via a USB Cable
Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the USB port. With this
connection, you can upgrade firmware and download programs to the controller
directly from your computer.

ATTENTION: The USB port is intended only for temporary local programming
purposes and not intended for permanent connection.
The USB cable is not to exceed 3.0 m (9.84 ft) and must not contain hubs.

WARNING: Do not use the USB port in hazardous locations.

Plug the USB cable into the CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller as shown.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Connect the Controller to an WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communication cable with
EtherNet/IP Network power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc
can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

Connect the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable to one of the Ethernet ports
on the controller. The ports are on the bottom of the controller.

ATTENTION: Do not plug a DH-485 network cable or a NAP cable into the
Ethernet port. Undesirable behavior or damage to the port can result.

Bottom of Controller

Port 1 - Front

Port 2 - Rear

IMPORTANT This example shows how to connect the controller to the network through one
port. Depending on the Ethernet network topology of your application, you can
connect both ports of the controller to the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on EtherNet/IP network topologies, see page 132.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 77

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers have embedded switch technology and

two EtherNet/IP ports that let you use it in different EtherNet/IP
network topologies:

• Device-level Ring network topology - Both ports on the controller are

connected to the network with requirements about how the connections
are made.

• Linear network topology - Both ports on the controller are connected to

the network with requirements about how the connections are made.

• Star network topology - One port on the controller is connected to

the network.

For more information, see EtherNet/IP Network Topologies on page 132.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 4

Complete Software Tasks Required at

CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Topic Page
Set the IP Address of a Controller 81
Change the IP Address of a Controller 96
Load the Controller Firmware 100
Select the Operating Mode of the Controller 113

To complete the tasks that are described in this chapter, you must have the
software that is described in the following table installed on your computer.

Software Required Version

RSLinx Classic 2.59.00 or later(1)
RSLogix 5000 20.xx.xx - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers using firmware
revision 20.xxx.
Studio 5000 environment 21.00.00 or later - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers using firmware
revision 21.000 or later.
BOOTP-DHCP server Most current version is installed with RSLinx Classic software installation
ControlFLASH™ Installed with the installation of one of the following:
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx
• Studio 5000 environment, version 21.00.00 or later
(1) CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers require RSLinx Classic software, version 2.59.01 or later.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers require a network Internet Protocol (IP) address

to operate on an EtherNet/IP network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 79

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

The IP address uniquely identifies the controller. The IP address is in the form
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where each xxx is a number from 000…254 with some
exceptions for reserved values. These numbers are examples of reserved values
you cannot use:

• 000.xxx.xxx.xxx

• 127.xxx.xxx.xxx

• 224 to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx

Some other values are reserved based on an application-by-application basis.

You can complete one of these tasks dependent on system conditions:

• Set the IP address for a controller that does not have one assigned.

• Change the IP address for a controller that has an IP address that is

assigned to it.

IMPORTANT CompactLogix 5370 controllers have two EtherNet/IP ports to connect to an

EtherNet/IP network. The ports carry the same network traffic as part of the
embedded switch of the controller. However, the controller uses only one IP
address.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Set the IP Address of a You must set the IP address of a CompactLogix 5370 controller when the
controller powers up for the first time, that is, when commissioning the controller
Controller for the first time. You are not required to set an IP address each time that power is
cycled to the controller.

You can use these tools to set the IP address of a CompactLogix 5370 controller:
• Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
• RSLinx Classic software
• Logix Designer application
• SD card

IMPORTANT Each tool has connection requirements to set the IP address of the controller
via that tool. For example, your computer must be connected to the controller
via a USB cable to set the initial IP address of the controller with RSLinx Classic
software or the application.

This graphic describes how to set the IP address of your CompactLogix 5370
controller on a power cycle during initial installation or after operation has
begun.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 81

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Controller Power Cycle

Use USB driver in Yes Computer

RSLinx Classic or the connected to
application to set controller via
the address. USB?

Does controller have IP

address in nonvolatile
Connect computer to No memory or is an SD card
controller via USB. No installed that is
configured to load a
project (with an IP
No address) to the controller
on a power cycle?

No
Is controller Is controller
DHCP- enabled? BOOTP- enabled?
Yes

Yes Yes

Use DHCP to set Use BOOTP server to

Controller has an IP address.
the IP address. set the IP address.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Use the BOOTP Server to Set the IP Address of the Controller

Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a protocol that enables the controller to

communicate with a BOOTP server. The server can be used to assign an IP
address. You can use the BOOTP server to set an IP address for your
CompactLogix 5370 controller.

Consider these points when using the BOOTP server:

• The BOOTP server is installed automatically when you install RSLinx

Classic or the Studio 5000 environment on your computer. The BOOTP
server sets an IP address and other Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
parameters.

• A CompactLogix 5370 controller ships from the factory without an IP

address and BOOTP-enabled.

• This section describes how to use a Rockwell Automation BOOTP/

DHCP server. If you use another BOOTP/DHCP server, contact your
network administrator to verify that you are using it correctly.

• To use the BOOTP server, your computer and the controller must be
connected to the same EtherNet/IP network.

• If the controller is BOOTP-disabled, you cannot use the BOOTP server

to set the IP address.

There are two conditions in which the CompactLogix 5370 controllers use the
BOOTP servers to set the IP address of the controller:

• Initial powerup - Because the CompactLogix 5370 controller ships with

BOOTP-enabled, when it is first powered up, the controller sends a
request for an IP address on the EtherNet/IP network. You can use the
BOOTP server to set the IP address, as described later in this section.

• Powerup after controller operation has begun - When controller power

is cycled after operation has begun, the BOOTP/DHCP server sets the IP
address if one of these conditions exists:

– Controller is BOOTP-enabled - You set the IP address manually with

the BOOTP server.
– Controller is DHCP-enabled - The IP address is set automatically via
the DHCP server.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 83

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Access the BOOTP/DHCP utility from one of these locations:

• Start>Programs>Rockwell Software>BOOTP-DHCP Server
If you have not installed the utility, you can download and install it from
http://www.ab.com/networks/ethernet/bootp.html.

• Tools directory on the programming software installation CD

IMPORTANT Before you start the BOOTP/DHCP utility, make sure that you have the hardware (MAC) address of the controller. The hardware
address is on the front of the controller and uses an address in a format similar to the following:
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Controller 1769-L24ER-QB1B Controller 1769-L33ER Controller

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Complete these steps to set the IP address of the controller with the
BOOTP/DHCP server.

IMPORTANT To use the BOOTP server, your computer and the controller must be connected
to the same EtherNet/IP network.

1. Start the BOOTP/DHCP software.

2. From the Tools menu, choose Network Settings.

3. Type the Subnet Mask of the network.

The Gateway address, Primary or Secondary DNS address, and Domain

Name fields are optional.
4. Click OK.

The Request History panel appears with the hardware addresses of all
devices that issue BOOTP requests. This process can take some time to
complete.
5. Select the appropriate module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 85

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

6. Click Add to Relation List.

The New Entry dialog box appears.

7. Type an IP Address, Hostname, and Description for the controller.

8. Click OK.
9. To assign this configuration to the controller, wait for the controller to
appear in the Relation List panel and select it.
10. Click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.

When power is cycled, the controller uses the assigned configuration and
does not issue a BOOTP request.

IMPORTANT If you do not click Disable BOOTP/DHCP on a power cycle, the host
controller clears the current IP configuration and begins sending
BOOTP requests again.

If you click Disable BOOTP/DHCP and it does not disable BOOTP/DHCP,

use RSLinx or the Studio 5000 environment to disable BOOTP/DHCP.

To disable BOOTP/DHCP from RSLinx, perform the following:

1. Make sure that a USB cable is connected to your computer and the
controller.
2. Start RSLinx Classic software.

After several seconds, an RSWho dialog box appears.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

3. If no RSWho dialog box appears, from the Communications pull-down

menu, choose RSWho.

4. Navigate to the USB network

5. Right-click on the controller and choose Module Configuration.

6. Click the Port Configuration tab.

7. From the Network Configuration Type, click Static to disable BOOTP/
DHCP.

8. Click OK.

To disable BOOTP/DHCP from the Studio 5000 environment, perform the

following:

1. Start the application.

2. Open the project.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 87

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

3. Right-click on the controller and choose Properties.

4. On the Controller Properties dialog box, click the Internet Protocol tab.
5. Click Manually configure IP settings.

6. Click OK.
7. When prompted to confirm the IP address setting, click Yes.

Using DHCP Software

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) software automatically assigns

IP addresses to client stations logging on to a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based
on BOOTP and maintains some backward compatibility. The main difference is
that BOOTP allows for manual configuration (static), while DHCP allows for
both static and dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to
newly attached modules.

Be cautious when using DHCP software to configure a module. A BOOTP

client, such as the EtherNet/IP communication modules, can start from a DHCP
server only if the DHCP server is written to handle BOOTP queries. This
requirement is specific to the DHCP software package used. Consult your
system administrator to see if a DHCP package supports BOOTP commands
and manual IP allocation.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

ATTENTION: The EtherNet/IP communication module must be assigned a fixed

network address. The IP address of this module must not be dynamically
provided.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss
of process control.

Use the DHCP Server to Set the IP Address of the Controller

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server automatically assigns IP

addresses to client stations logging on to a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on
BOOTP and maintains some backward compatibility. The main difference is
that BOOTP manual configuration (static), while DHCP enables static and
dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached
controllers.

Be cautious when using the DHCP server to configure a controller. A BOOTP

client, such as the CompactLogix 5370 controllers, can start from a DHCP
server only if the DHCP server is written to handle BOOTP queries. This
requirement is specific to the DHCP server used. Consult your system
administrator to see if a DHCP server supports BOOTP commands and manual
IP allocation.

ATTENTION: Assign the CompactLogix 5370 controllers a fixed network

address. The IP address of this controller is not to be dynamically provided.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in unintended machine motion or
loss of process control.

If you use the Rockwell Automation BOOTP or DHCP server in an uplinked

subnet where a DHCP server exists, a controller can procure an address from the
enterprise server before the Rockwell Automation utility even sees the controller.
Disconnect from the uplink to set the address and configure the controller to
retain its static address before reconnecting to the uplink, if necessary.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 89

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use RSLinx Software to Set the IP Address of the Controller

You can use RSLinx software to set the IP address of the CompactLogix 5370
controller.

IMPORTANT To set the IP address, that is, assign an IP address to a controller that does not
have one, for a CompactLogix 5370 controller via RSLinx software, you must be
connected to your controller via the USB port.

Complete these steps to set the IP address of the controller with RSLinx
software.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps would also apply
to all CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Make sure that a USB cable is connected to your computer and the
controller.
2. Start RSLinx software.

After several seconds, an RSWho dialog box appears.

3. If no RSWho dialog box appears, from the Communications pull-down
menu, choose RSWho.

The RSWho dialog box appears and includes the USB driver.
4. Right-click the EtherNet/IP module and choose Module Configuration.

The Module Configuration dialog box appears.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

5. Click the Port Configuration tab.

6. For Network Configuration Type, select Static to assign this configuration

to the port.

IMPORTANT If you click Dynamic, on a power cycle, the controller clears the
current IP configuration and starts to send BOOTP requests.

7. Type the new IP address and Network Mask.

8. Click OK.

As with all configuration changes, if desired, make sure that you are using the SD
card in a way that does not overwrite the IP address at the next controller power
cycle.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 91

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use the Studio 5000 Environment to Set the IP Address of the

Controller
You can use Logix Designer application to set the IP address of a CompactLogix
5370 controller. To set the IP address via the application, you must be connected
to your controller via the USB port.

Complete these steps to set the IP address of the controller.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L18ERMBB1B controller. The same steps would also
apply to all CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Start the application.

2. Set the Project Path.
a. Click RSWho.

The RSWho dialog box appears.

b. Navigate over the USB network and select the

CompactLogix 5370 controller.

c. Click Set Project Path.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

3. Click Download.

4. Click Download again.

The new project is downloaded to the controller and the project goes
online, in Remote Program or Program mode.
5. Right-click the controller name and choose Properties.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 93

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

6. On the Controller Properties dialog box, click the Internet Protocol tab.

The IP Settings Configuration values show that the controller has no IP

address that is assigned to it.

7. Click Manually configure IP settings.

8. Enter desired IP address and other configuration information and
click OK.

9. When prompted to confirm the IP address setting, click Yes.

The controller now uses the newly set IP address.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Use the SD Card to Set the IP Address of the Controller

You can use an SD card to set the IP address for a CompactLogix 5370 controller.
Using the SD card to set the IP address eliminates the need for software to
complete this task.

IMPORTANT To set the IP address from an SD card, software is not required during the
power-up process. However, you must have previously saved the project to the
SD card.
The IP address of the CompactLogix 5370 controller is automatically configured
at power-up as long as you have configured an IP address, stored the program
onto a controller, and set the SD card to the Load Image parameter set to On
Power Up.
The option to set the IP address of a CompactLogix 5370 controller via an SD
card at power-up is only one part of the process to load an entire project to the
controller from the SD card.
Use this option carefully. For example, the SD card can contain a desirable IP
address as part of an undesirable project, for example, a project that is older
than the project currently used on the controller.

These requirements apply when using the SD card to set the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller:

• A project must be stored on the SD card.

• The project that is stored on the SD card is configured with the Load
Image parameter set to On Power Up.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 95

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Change the IP Address of a You can change the IP address of a CompactLogix 5370 controller after system
operation has begun. In this case, the controller has an IP address that is assigned
Controller to it, but you must change that IP address.

You can use these tools to changethe IP address of a controller:

• RSLinx Classic software
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
• SD card

IMPORTANT You cannot use any of these tools to change a the IP address of a controller:
• Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server

Consider these factors when you determine how to change the IP address of a
controller:
• Network isolation from, or integration into, the plant/enterprise network

• Network size - For large, isolated networks, it can be more convenient and
safer to use a BOOTP/DHCP server rather than
the Studio 5000 environment or RSLinx Classic software. A BOOTP/
DHCP server limits the possibility of duplicate IP address assignment.

However, you can only use the BOOTP/DHCP server to set the IP
address of the controller and not to change it. If you decide to change the
IP address of the controller and want to use a BOOTP/DHCP server to
limit the possibility of duplicate IP address assignment, you must first clear
the IP address.

After clearing the IP address, use the steps that are described at Use the
BOOTP Server to Set the IP Address of the Controller on page 83 or Use
the DHCP Server to Set the IP Address of the Controller on page 89 to
set the IP address of the controller.

• Company policies and procedures that deal with plant floor network
installation and maintenance

• Level of involvement by IT personnel in plant-floor network installation

and maintenance

• Type of training that is offered to control engineers and maintenance

personnel

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Change the Network IP Address with RSLinx Classic Software

IMPORTANT The steps in Use RSLinx Software to Set the IP Address of the Controller on
page 90 describe how to assign an IP address for a CompactLogix 5370
controller that does not have an IP address.
The steps in this section describe how to change the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller that has an IP address that is assigned to it.

The graphics in this section show how to change the IP address for a
1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps would also apply to all other
CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Right-click the controller and choose Module Configuration.

2. Click the Port Configuration tab when the Module Configuration dialog
box appears.

The controller has an IP address and Network Configuration Type.

3. Type a new IP address and make any other desired changes.
4. To assign this configuration to the controller, click Static in the Network
Configuration Type section of the dialog box.

IMPORTANT If you click Dynamic, on a power cycle, the controller clears the
current IP configuration and starts to send BOOTP or DHCP
requests, depending on the controller configuration.

5. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 97

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Change the Network IP Address with Logix Designer Application

IMPORTANT The steps in Use the Studio 5000 Environment to Set the IP Address of the
Controller on page 92 describe how to assign an IP address for a
CompactLogix 5370 controller that does not have an IP address.
The steps in this section describe how to change the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller that has an IP address that is assigned to it.

You can change the IP address of a CompactLogix 5370 controller via Logix
Designer application over a USB or EtherNet/IP network connection.

The graphics in this section show how to change the IP address for a
1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller over a USB connection. The same steps would
also apply to all other CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in
screens.

1. Verify that your computer is connected to the controller.

2. Verify that your project is online.
3. Right-click the controller name and choose Properties.

You can also right-click the Ethernet node in the I/O Configuration
section and choose Properties. The Controller Properties dialog box
appears on the Internet Protocol tab.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

4. Change the IP address of the controller.

5. Make other changes where necessary.

6. Click OK.

Change the Network IP Address with an SD Card

You can use an SD card to change the IP address for a CompactLogix 5370
controller when controller power is cycled. Using the SD card to change the IP
address removes the need for software to complete this task.

IMPORTANT To set the IP address from an SD card, software is not required during the
power-up process. However, you must have previously saved the project to the
SD card.

These requirements apply when using the SD card to change the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller:

• A project is stored on the SD card.

• The project that is stored on the SD card includes another IP address for
the CompactLogix 5370 controller than the IP address currently in use on
the physical controller that houses the SD card.

• The project that is stored on the SD card is configured with the Load
Image parameter set to On Power Up.

• Power is cycled to the controller with the SD card installed.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 99

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Load the Controller Firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the
CompactLogix 5370 controller.

IMPORTANT Do not interrupt a firmware upgrade while it is in process. Firmware upgrade

interruption can cause the firmware revision of the CompactLogix 5370
controller to revert to its out-of-the-box revision level, that is, 1.xxx.

To load firmware, you can use any of the following:

• ControlFLASH software that installs with Logix Designer application

• AutoFlash that launches through the application when you download a

project and the controller does not have the matching firmware revision

• SD card (catalog numbers 1784-SD1 or 1784-SD2) with an image stored

on the card

If you use the ControlFLASH or AutoFlash utilities, you need an EtherNet/IP

network or USB connection to the controller.

IMPORTANT The controller firmware revision that is loaded via the ControlFLASH software
or the AutoFlash option can be overwritten after future controller power cycles
if the conditions described in Use the Secure Digital Card to Load Firmware on
page 112 exist.

The firmware is available with the application or you can download it from the
support website. Go to http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support.

Complete these steps to download firmware from the support website.

1. On the Rockwell Automation Support Page, click Product Compatibility

and Download Center under the Resources heading.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

2. Click the Get Downloads tab.

3. Click Find Product Downloads.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 101

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

4. Type a term in the Product Search field.

5. Select the correct series of the controller.

6. Click the correct product and select the desired firmware revision.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

7. Click Downloads when the firmware is displayed in the Selections

window.

8. Click the show downloads icon.

9. Click the Firmware link.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 103

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

10. Enter the required credentials and click Sign In.

11. Click I Agree.

The Download Manager window appears.

12. Click Close when the download is complete.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Use the ControlFLASH Software to Load Firmware

You can use the ControlFLASH software to load firmware through a USB or
EtherNet/IP network connection. We recommend the following when you load
firmware via the ControlFLASH software:
• Use a USB connection to load the firmware.
• Remove the SD card, if one is installed in the controller.

Complete these steps to use the ControlFLASH software to load firmware.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps would also apply
to all other CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Verify that a connection exists between your computer and the

CompactLogix 5370 controller.
2. Choose Start>Programs>FLASH Programming Tools>ControlFLASH.

3. When the Welcome dialog box appears, click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 105

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

4. Choose the controller catalog number and click Next.

5. Expand the network until you see the controller.

6. Choose the controller at the first instance in which it appears, as shown in
the following graphic, and click OK.

IMPORTANT If you expand the controller, that is, expand the network beyond the
first instance in which it appears on the left side of the screen, you
receive the following message:
• The target device is not in the proper mode to accept an update in
ControlFLASH.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

7. Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and
click Next.

8. To start the update of the controller, click Finish and click Yes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 107

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Before the firmware upgrade begins, you see the following dialog box. Take
the required action for your application. In this example, the upgrade
continues when OK is clicked.

After the controller is updated, the status dialog box displays the message
Update complete.

9. Click OK.
10. To close the ControlFLASH software, click Cancel and click Yes.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Automatic Upgrade for CompactLogix 5370 L1 Embedded I/O Module

IMPORTANT This section applies only to CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers.

After the controller firmware upgrade process is complete, the controller can
execute a firmware upgrade for its embedded I/O module.

Remember these points regarding the automatic firmware upgrade for the
embedded I/O module:

• The firmware upgrade occurs on only the embedded I/O module, not the
local expansion modules.

If you must update the firmware revision on any 1734 POINT I/O
modules that are used as local expansion modules, you must do so before
installing them in the CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

• The firmware upgrade on the embedded I/O module occurs automatically.

No user action is required.

• The upgrade process can take a few minutes to complete.

• During the firmware upgrade process, the OK status indicator on the

controller remains in a flashing red state.

• Do not cycle power to the controller while the firmware upgrade for
embedded I/O module is taking place.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 109

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use AutoFlash to Load Firmware

You can use AutoFlash to load firmware through a USB or EtherNet/IP

network connection.

Let the upgrade complete without interruption. If you interrupt a firmware

upgrade that is in process, you are alerted that an error has occurred. In this case,
cycle power to the controller. The firmware revision level reverts to the 1.xxx
revision level and you can begin the upgrade process again.

Complete these steps to use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps would also apply
to all CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Make sure that the network connection is made and your network driver is
configured in RSLinx Classic software.
2. Create a controller project.
3. Click RSWho to specify the controller path.

4. Select your controller and click Download.

You can also choose to click Update Firmware to complete this process. If
you do so, skip to step 6.

A dialog box appears to indicate that the project revision and controller
firmware revision are different.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

5. Click Update Firmware.

6. Use the checkbox and pull-down menu to choose your controller and
firmware revision.
7. Click Update.

8. When the Update Firmware dialog box appears, click Yes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 111

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Before the firmware upgrade begins, you can be warned about your
controller missing its SD card. Take the required action, typically click
OK.

The firmware upgrade begins.

9. When the firmware upgrade is complete, the Download dialog box
appears and you can continue by downloading your project to the
controller.

Use the Secure Digital Card to Load Firmware

You can use an installed SD card to load firmware on a CompactLogix 5370

controller. Using the SD card to load firmware eliminates the need for software to
complete this task.

IMPORTANT An installed SD card automatically updates the firmware of the controller if the
SD card is configured with the Load Image parameter set to On Power Up. This
feature is and cannot be disabled.

Your application requires the following to load firmware from an SD card at

power-up:

• You must have saved the project to the SD card before the power cycle.

• The firmware revision in the project that is stored on the SD card differs
from the firmware revision on the CompactLogix 5370 controller.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Select the Operating Mode of CompactLogix 5370 controllers have slightly different front designs and mode
switch placements.
the Controller
WARNING: When you change switch settings while power is on, an electrical
arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

This graphic shows the mode switch on a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

This graphic shows the mode switch on a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 113

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

This graphic shows the mode switch on a CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller.

Use the mode switch on the controller to set the operating mode of the
CompactLogix 5370 controller.

Mode Switch Description

Position
Run You can perform these tasks:
• Upload projects.
• Run the program and enable outputs.
You cannot perform these tasks:
• Update controller firmware.
• Create or delete tasks, programs, or routines.
• Create or delete tags or edit online.
• Import a program to the controller.
• Change the port configuration of the controller, advanced port configuration, nor network configuration settings.
• Change controller configuration parameters that are directly set for operation on a device-level ring (DLR) network topology.
Prog You can perform these tasks:
• Update controller firmware.
• Disable outputs.
• Upload/download projects.
• Create, modify, and delete tasks, programs, or routines.
• Change the port configuration of the controller, advanced port configuration, nor network configuration settings.
You cannot perform these tasks:
• Use the controller to execute (scan) tasks.

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Mode Switch Description

Position
Rem You can perform these tasks:
• Upload/download projects.
• Change the port configuration of the controller, advanced port configuration, nor network configuration settings.
• Change between Remote Program, Remote Test, and Remote Run modes through the application.
Remote Run • The controller executes (scans) tasks.
• Enable outputs.
• Edit online.
Remote Program • Update controller firmware.
• Disable outputs.
• Create, modify, and delete tasks, programs, or routines.
• Download projects.
• Edit online.
• The controller does not execute (scan) tasks.
Remote Test • Execute tasks with outputs disabled.
• Edit online.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 115

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Notes:

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 5

CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Topic Page
CompactLogix 5370 Control System Components 118
Controller Functionality 119
Electronic Keying 121

The CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer state-of-the-art control,

communication, and I/O elements in a distributed control package. This product
family includes the following CompactLogix 5370 controllers:
• 1769-L16ER-BB1B
• 1769-L18ER-BB1B
• 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
• 1769-L24ER-QB1B
• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
• 1769-L30ER
• 1769-L30ERM
• 1769-L30ER-NSE
• 1769-L33ER
• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-L36ERM

Among the features the CompactLogix 5370 controllers support, are dual
EtherNet/IP ports on each controller and support for Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network on some CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

For a complete description of the CompactLogix 5370 control system

components and functionality, see Table 2 and Table 3, respectively.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 117

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

CompactLogix 5370 Control Table 2 describes components a CompactLogix 5370 controller uses in a typical
control system.
System Components
Table 2 - CompactLogix 5370 Control System Components
System Component Product Family
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers
Controller One of the controllers that is documented in this publication
Power supply External power supply that is connected to the External power supply that is connected to the One of the following 1769 Compact I/O power
embedded 24V DC nominal input of the embedded 24V DC input of the controller, supplies:
controller, nonisolated power supply. The isolated power supply • 1769-PA2
power supply has a 10…28.8 input range.
• 1769-PB2
• 1769-PA4
• 1769-PB4
Communication networks Any of the following: Any of the following:
components • EtherNet/IP network via built-in EtherNet/ • EtherNet/IP network via built-in EtherNet/IP network ports
IP network ports • DeviceNet network via a 1769-SDN module
• USB connection only for programming and • USB connection only for programming and firmware upgrades
firmware upgrades
Software • One of the following:
– RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx, - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers that are using firmware revision 20.xxx
– Logix Designer application, version 21.00.00 or later, - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers that are using firmware revision 21.000 or later
• RSLinx Classic software, version 2.59.xx or later
• RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet software, version 11.00.00 or later
IMPORTANT: This software is not used with CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers because they do not offer DeviceNet connectivity.
Secure Digital (SD) card for • 1784-SD1 card - Ships with CompactLogix 5370 controller and offers 1 GB of memory
external nonvolatile memory • 1784-SD2 card - Available for separate purchase and offers 2 GB of memory
I/O modules • 16 embedded 24V DC digital input points - • 16 embedded 24V DC digital input points • Local expansion modules- 1769 Compact
The nominal input voltage is 24V DC but the • 16 embedded 24V DC digital output points I/O modules
operating range is 10…28.8V DC. • Distributed I/O - Multiple I/O module
• Only 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
• 16 embedded 24V DC digital output points - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers product lines over DeviceNet and
The nominal input voltage is 24V DC but the – Four embedded high-speed counters EtherNet/IP networks
operating range is 10…28.8V DC. – Four embedded universal analog input
• Local expansion modules- 1734 POINT I/O points
modules – Two embedded analog output points
• Distributed I/O - Multiple I/O module • Local expansion modules- 1769 Compact
product lines over an EtherNet/IP network I/O modules
• Distributed I/O - Multiple I/O module
product lines over DeviceNet and
EtherNet/IP networks
Reset button If held in during controller powerup, it clears the user program from the internal memory of the controller.

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

Controller Functionality Table 3 describes functionality available with CompactLogix 5370 controllers.
Table 3 - CompactLogix 5370 Controller Functionality
Cat. No. Controller Tasks Programs Internal Energy EtherNet/IP Power Supply On-board User Local I/O Module
Supported Supported Per Storage Solution Network Distance Rating Memory Size Support
Task Topology
Support
1769-L16ER-BB1B As many as six
384 KB 1734 POINT I/O
modules(2)
NA
1769-L18ER-BB1B As many as eight
512 KB 1734 POINT I/O
1769-L18ERM-BB1B modules(2)
1769-L24ER-QB1B
Support the 768 KB As many as four
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B following See footnote(1) Compact I/O
topologies: modules
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Yes - Eliminating 1 MB
32 1000 the need for a • Device-level
1769-L30ER battery ring (DLR)
As many as eight
1769-L30ER-NSE • Linear 1 MB Compact I/O
• Traditional star modules
1769-L30ERM
1769-L33ER 4 As many as 16
2 MB Compact I/O
1769-L33ERM modules
1769-L36ERM As many as 30
3 MB Compact I/O
modules
(1) CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers have an embedded power supply. Therefore, you do not need to consider power supply distance rating when installing the controller. The Compact I/O modules that
are used as local expansion modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems operate on a CompactBus and do have a power supply distance rating you must consider when installing those modules.
For more information on power supply distance rating regarding using Compact I/O modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, see page 147 and page 226.
(2) IMPORTANT: You can use up to the maximum number of 1734 POINT I/O modules with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers that are listed in Table 1, as long as the total current drawn by the modules
does not exceed the available POINTBus backplane current of 1 A. If you must use more local expansion modules than the POINTBus backplane current supports, you can install a 1734-EP24DC POINT I/
O expansion power supply between local expansion modules to increase the POINTBus backplane power and meet your system requirements.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 119

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

The 1769-L30ER-NSE controller is intended for use in applications that require

the installed controller to deplete its residual stored energy to specific levels
before transporting it into or out of your application.
.

WARNING: If your application requires the 1769-L30ER-NSE controller to

deplete its residual stored energy to 40 μJ or fewer before you transport it into
or out of the application, complete these steps before you remove the
controller.

1.Turn off power to the chassis.

After you turn off power, the controller’s OK status indicator transitions from
Green to Solid Red to OFF.

2.Wait at least 15 minutes for the residual stored energy to decrease to 40 μJ

or fewer before you remove the controller.
There is no visual indication of when the 15 minutes has expired. You must track
that time period.

IMPORTANT The Real Time Clock (RTC) does not retain its time and date when the power is
off.

Some applications that require the installed controller deplete its residual stored
energy to specific levels before transporting it into or out of your application.
This can include other devices that also require a wait time before removing
them. See the documentation of those products for more information.

Support for Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network

The following CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over

an EtherNet/IP network:
• 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
• 1769-L30ERM
• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-L36ERM

For more information on using CompactLogix 5370 controllers in applications

that require Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see Chapter 11,
Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application on
page 289.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

Electronic Keying Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a
control system. It compares the device that is defined in your project to the
installed device. If keying fails, a fault occurs. These attributes are compared.

Attribute Description
Vendor The device manufacturer.
Device Type The general type of the product, for example, digital I/O module.
Product Code The specific type of the product. The Product Code maps to a catalog number.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities of a device.
Minor Revision A number that represents behavior changes in the device.

The following Electronic Keying options are available.

Keying Option Description

Compatible Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the
Module installed device can emulate the defined device. With Compatible Module, you can typically
replace a device with another device that has the following characteristics:
• Same catalog number
• Same or higher Major Revision
• Minor Revision as follows:
– If the Major Revision is the same, the Minor Revision must be the same or higher.
– If the Major Revision is higher, the Minor Revision can be any number.
Disable Keying Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a
device. With Disable Keying, communication can occur with a device other than the type specified
in the project.
ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disable Keying; if used incorrectly, this option can
lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying.
If you use Disable Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the device
being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application.
Exact Match Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication. If any attribute does
not match precisely, communication with the device does not occur.

Carefully consider the implications of each keying option when selecting one.

IMPORTANT Changing Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections to the device and
any devices that are connected through the device. Connections from other controllers
can also be broken.
If an I/O connection to a device is interrupted, the result can be a loss of data.

More Information
For more detailed information on Electronic Keying, see Electronic Keying in
Logix5000 Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-
AT001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 121

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Example System CompactLogix 5370 controllers support the following networks:

Configurations • EtherNet/IP network - All CompactLogix 5370 controllers
• DeviceNet network - Only CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers

EtherNet/IP Network

IMPORTANT Figure 2, Figure 3, and Figure 4 show CompactLogix 5370 controllers that are
used in a DLR network topology on an EtherNet/IP network. You can also use
CompactLogix 5370 controllers in linear or star EtherNet/IP network
topologies.
For more information on the other EtherNet/IP network topologies, see
Communicate over Networks on page 127.
Some of the CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network, if desired. For more information on using Integrated
Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see Chapter 11, Develop Integrated
Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application on page 289.

Figure 2 shows an example EtherNet/IP system configuration for a

1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller.

Figure 2 - Example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Configuration on an EtherNet/IP Network

1783-ETAP 1769-L18ERM-BB1B

• Kinetix 350
• PanelView™ Plus
• 1783-ETAP
• 1783-ETAP

• Kinetix 350 1734-AENTR POINT I/O 1794-AENTR FLEX™ I/O

• 1783-ETAP

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

Figure 3 shows an example EtherNet/IP system configuration for a

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 3 - Example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Configuration on an

EtherNet/IP Network

• 1769-AENTR
1783-ETAP • 1769 Compact I/O 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

• PowerFlex 525
• 1783-ETAP • PanelView Plus
• 1783-ETAP

• Kinetix 350 1734-AENTR POINT I/O 1794-AENTR FLEX I/O

• 1783-ETAP

Figure 4 shows an example EtherNet/IP system configuration for a

1769-L33ERM controller.

Figure 4 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Configuration on an EtherNet/IP Network

• 1769-AENTR
1783-ETAP • 1769 Compact I/O 1769-L33ERM Control System

• Kinetix 350 • PanelView Plus

• 1783-ETAP • 1783-ETAP

Kinetix 6500
1734-AENTR POINT I/O • 1794-AENT FLEX I/O
• 1783-ETAP

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 123

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

DeviceNet Network

IMPORTANT CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers can send messages to devices on the
DeviceNet network; however, these controllers cannot receive messages
from those devices on the DeviceNet network.

Figure 5 shows an example DeviceNet system configuration for a CompactLogix

1769-L24ER-QB1B controller.

Figure 5 - Example 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System Configuration on a DeviceNet Network

• 1769-L24ER-QB1B
DeviceNet Connection • 1769-SDN Scanner

1606-XLDNET E3 Overload Relay • 1734-ADN POINT I/O

• POINT I/O

Figure 6 shows an example DeviceNet system configuration for a CompactLogix

1769-L33ERM controller.

Figure 6 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Configuration on a DeviceNet Network

• 1769-L33ERM
DeviceNet Connection
• 1769-SDN Scanner

1606-XLDNET E3 Overload Relay • 1734-ADN POINT I/O

• POINT I/O

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

For more information on using the CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controllers on

DeviceNet networks, see Communicate over Networks on page 127.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 125

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Notes:

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 6

Communicate over Networks

Topic Page
EtherNet/IP Network Communication 128
DeviceNet Network Communication 143

All CompactLogix 5370 controllers support these tasks over an

EtherNet/IP network:
• Control distributed I/O
• Send/receive messages to/from other devices on the same network or
another network
• Produce/consume (interlock) data between controllers
• Socket interface

CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers support these tasks over a

DeviceNet network:
• Control distributed I/O
• Send messages to devices on the same network; the controller cannot
receive messages from other devices on the network.

All CompactLogix 5370 controllers also support temporary connections from

your computer via a USB connection.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 127

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

EtherNet/IP Network The EtherNet/IP network offers a full suite of control, configuration, and data
collection services by layering the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) over the
Communication standard internet protocols, such as TCP/IP and UDP. This combination of
well-accepted standards provides the capability that is required to support
information data exchange and control applications.

The CompactLogix 5370 controllers use socket interface transactions and

conventional communication over the EtherNet/IP network to communicate
with Ethernet devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP application protocol.

For more information on socket interface transactions, see Socket Interface with
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers on page 138.

Available Software

You use the software that is listed in the following table with a CompactLogix
5370 controller on an EtherNet/IP network.

Software Required Version Functions Required

RSLogix 5000 Version 20.xx.xx - For CompactLogix • Configure the CompactLogix
5370 controllers that are using project.
firmware revision 20.xxx. • Define EtherNet/IP communication.
Studio 5000 Version 21.00.00 or later - For • Change IP address for devices on
environment CompactLogix 5370 controllers that are network, including the
using firmware revision 21.000 or later. CompactLogix 5370 controller.
Yes
RSLinx Classic Version 2.59 or later • Assign or change IP addresses to
devices on an EtherNet/IP network.
• Configure communication devices.
• Provide diagnostics.
• Establish communication between
devices.
BOOTP/DHCP Most current version is installed with Assign IP addresses to devices on an No
utility RSLinx Classic software installation EtherNet/IP network.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

EtherNet/IP Network Functionality on

CompactLogix 5370 Controllers
The CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer this EtherNet/IP
network functionality:

• Dual built-in EtherNet/IP network ports

• Support for the following EtherNet/IP network topologies:

– Device-level Ring Network Topology
– Linear Network Topology
– Star Network Topology

• Support for CIP Sync technology

• Support for Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network - Only the

following controllers support this functionality:
– 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
– 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
– 1769-L30ERM
– 1769-L33ERM
– 1769-L36ERM

• Socket interface to communicate with Ethernet devices that do not

support the EtherNet/IP application protocol

• Duplicate IP address detection

• Unicast and multicast communication

• Support messaging, produced/consumed tags, HMI, and distributed I/O

• Interface via RJ45, twisted-pair cables

• Support half/full-duplex 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps operation

• Support standard switches

• No network scheduling required

• No routing tables required

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 129

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network

When configuring your CompactLogix 5370 control system, you must account
for the number of Ethernet nodes you include in the I/O configuration section of
your project. CompactLogix 5370 controllers have limits on the number of nodes
they support in the I/O configuration section.

Table 4 lists the Ethernet node limits for CompactLogix controllers.

Table 4 - CompactLogix 5370 Controller Ethernet Node Guidelines
Cat. No. Ethernet Nodes Supported
1769-L16ER-BB1B 4
1769-L18ER-BB1B
8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B
1769-L24ER-QB1B
8
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 16
1769-L30ER
1769-L30ERM 16
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER
32
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 48

IMPORTANT While CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer the option of using Ethernet node
count to effectively design a control system, the controllers do have connection
limits on an EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on how to design EtherNet/IP network use in your
CompactLogix 5370 control system, see these resources:
• The EtherNet/IP Capacity Tool available at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/products-
technologies/integrated-architecture/tools/overview.page#/tab3.
The EtherNet/IP Capacity Tool helps you in the initial layout of your
EtherNet/IP network.

• Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication

ENET-RM002

• Appendix B, Connections over an EtherNet/IP Network on page 315.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Devices Included in the Node Count

Any devices that you add directly to the local Ethernet I/O configuration are
counted toward the node limitation of the controller. The following are example
devices that are added to the I/O configuration section in your project and must
be counted:
• Remote communication adapters
• I/O modules that are directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, for
example the 1732E-IB16M12R ArmorBlock EtherNet/IP module
• Motion devices, such as drives
• Remote controllers
• HMI devices that are included in the I/O configuration section, for
example, PanelView Plus terminals
• Linking devices, such as the 1788-EN2DNR, Ethernet-to-DeviceNet
linking device
• Third-party devices that are directly connected to the
EtherNet/IP network

Devices Excluded from the Node Count

When considering the Ethernet node limitation of a CompactLogix 5370

controller, you do not count Ethernet devices that exist on the EtherNet/IP
network but are not added to the I/O configuration section of the project.

The following devices are not added to the I/O configuration section in your
project and are not counted among the total number of nodes:

• Computer

• HMIs that are not added to the I/O configuration section, for example,
PanelView Plus terminals

• MSG instructions

• Devices the CompactLogix 5370 controllers use a socket interface to

communicate with.

For example, the following devices require communication via a socket

interface:
– Modbus TCP/IP device
– Barcode scanners

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 131

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

CompactLogix 5370 controllers support these EtherNet/IP network types:

• Device-level Ring Network Topology

• Linear Network Topology

• Star Network Topology

Each of these EtherNet/IP network topologies supports applications that use

Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, if necessary.

Device-level Ring Network Topology

A DLR network topology is a single-fault tolerant ring network that is intended

for the interconnection of automation devices. A DLR network is comprised of
Supervisor (Active and Backup) nodes and Ring nodes.

DLR network topologies automatically convert to linear network topologies

when a fault is detected. The conversion to the new network topology maintains
communication of data on the network. The fault condition is typically easily
detected and corrected.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers connect directly to a DLR network topology,

that is, without requiring a 1783-ETAP tap to connect to the network. The
controllers can function in any of the roles on a DLR network topology, that is,
active supervisor node, back-up supervisor node or ring node.

T
IMPORTANT The topology graphics that are shown in this section are examples of
applications that use only DLR network topologies.
We recommend that you exercise caution if you consider designing an
application that includes the connection of a DLR topology with a linear or star
network topology.

For more information on using a DLR network topology, see the EtherNet/IP
Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, publication ENET-AP005.

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Figure 7 shows an example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system using a DLR

network topology.

Figure 7 - Example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Using DLR Network Topology

1783-ETAP 1769-L18ERM-BB1B

• Kinetix 350
• PanelView Plus
• 1783-ETAP
• 1783-ETAP

• Kinetix 350 1734-AENTR POINT I/O 1794-AENTR FLEX I/O

• 1783-ETAP

Figure 8 shows an example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system using a

DLR network topology.

Figure 8 - Example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Using DLR Network Topology

1783-ETAP 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

• Kinetix 350
• PanelView Plus
• 1783-ETAP
• 1783-ETAP

• Kinetix 350 1734-AENTR POINT I/O 1794-AENTR FLEX I/O

• 1783-ETAP

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 133

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Figure 9 shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system using a DLR

network topology.

Figure 9 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a DLR Network Topology

1783-ETAP 1769-L33ERM

• Kinetix 350 • PanelView Plus

• 1783-ETAP • 1783-ETAP

Kinetix 5500
1734-AENTR POINT I/O • 1794-AENT FLEX I/O
• 1783-ETAP

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Linear Network Topology

A linear network topology is a collection of devices that are daisy-chained

together across an EtherNet/IP network. Devices that can connect to a linear
network topology use embedded switch technology to remove any need for a
separate switch, as required in Star network topologies.

Figure 10 shows an example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system using a linear

network topology.

Figure 10 - Example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Using a Linear Network Topology

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

PanelView Plus

1769-L18ERM-BB1B • Kinetix 350 • Kinetix 350

• 1783-ETAP • 1783-ETAP

Figure 11 shows an example 1769-L24ER-QB1B control system using a linear

network topology.

Figure 11 - Example 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System Using a Linear Network Topology

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

PanelView Plus

1769-L24ER-QB1B 1732E-IB16M12R • Kinetix 350 Drive

• 1783-ETAP

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 135

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Figure 12 shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system using a linear

network topology.

Figure 12 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a Linear Network Topology

• 1794-AENT FLEX
• 1783-ETAP 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

PanelView Plus

1769-L33ERM

• PowerFlex 525
• 1783-ETAP
Kinetix 5500

Star Network Topology

A star network topology is a traditional EtherNet/IP network that includes

multiple devices that are connected to each other via an Ethernet switch.

Figure 13 show a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system using a star topology.

Figure 13 - Example1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Using a Star Network Topology

1769-L18ERM-BB1B

Stratix 6000
PanelView Plus
1732E-IB16M12R

Kinetix 350 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Figure 14 show a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system using a star topology.

Figure 14 - Example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Using a Star Network Topology

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

Stratix 6000
PanelView Plus
PowerFlex 525

Kinetix 350 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

Figure 15 shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system using a star topology.

Figure 15 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a Star Network Topology

1769-L33ERM

Stratix 6000
PanelView Plus
Kinetix 6500

PowerFlex 525 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 137

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Socket Interface with CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

The CompactLogix 5370 controller can use socket interfaces to communicate

with Ethernet devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP application protocol.

Examples of devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP application protocol

but can be used in a CompactLogix 5370 controller application include the
following:
• Modbus TCP/IP device
• Barcode scanners
• RFID readers

The socket interface is implemented via the Socket Object. CompactLogix 5370
controllers communicate with the Socket Object via MSG instructions. All
CompactLogix 5370 controllers must use unconnected MSG instructions with
socket interfaces.

The Socket Object service lets the controller perform these actions:
• Open connections
• Accept incoming connections
• Send data
• Receive data

To communicate with another device, you must understand the application

protocol of the other device. The CompactLogix 5370 controller has no
application protocol knowledge. The controller makes the socket services
available to its program.

Number and Type of Sockets

The CompactLogix 5370 controllers support up to 32 socket instances. Each

instance can be one of these types:

• UDP socket - Sends and receives UDP datagrams.

• TCP client socket - The Logix5000 program initiates the connection.

• TCP server socket - Another device initiates the connection to the

Logix5000 program.

• TCP listen socket - Listens on a specified port number for incoming

connections.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

The options available for UDP and TCP send and receive services are described
in this table.

Type Communication Send (Write) Receive (Read)

UDP Unicast Yes Yes
Multicast Yes Yes
Broadcast Yes Yes
TCP Unicast Yes Yes
Multicast N/A N/A
Broadcast N/A N/A

You must have a listen socket for each TCP port number that accepts
connections. Multiple TCP server sockets can share a listen socket if the
connections are made to the same port number.

You can partition the available socket instances between UDP and TCP sockets
in these ways:
• Use all instances for client TCP connections.
• Use one instance to listen for incoming TCP connections and accept the
remaining connections from other devices.
• Perform TCP client and server operations.
• Perform TCP and UDP operations.

These socket services are available.

Socket Service Socket Instance

SocketCreate Server or client
OpenConnection Client
AcceptConnection • If you issue an AcceptConnection service, the instance is listen type.
• If the AcceptConnection service returns an instance as a result of an
incoming connection request, the socket instance is server type
ReadSocket
WriteSocket
DeleteSocket
DeleteAllSockets Server or client
ClearLog
JoinMulticastAddress
DropMulticastAddress

Once you open a connection on a client socket instance, you cannot use the same
socket instance to accept incoming connections. Similarly, if you accept
connections on a socket instance, you cannot use the instance to open outgoing
connections. This behavior is consistent with standard socket API behavior.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 139

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Message Instructions to Use Socket Services

IMPORTANT This section describes only one of the socket services available with your
CompactLogix 5370 controller.
For more information on all socket services, see the EtherNet/IP Socket
Interface Application Technique, publication ENET-AT002.

In the CompactLogix 5370 controller program, use a CIP Generic MSG

instruction to request socket services.

The following example graphics show the Configuration and Communication

tabs for a MSG instruction that uses the OpenConnection service type. The
parameter values for this MSG type are defined Table 5.

IMPORTANT Before you can configure the MSG instruction, you must create a user-defined
data type (UDT) that is available in the Source Element parameter. See MSG
Source Element for more information on how to create a UDT.

IMPORTANT: Keep the following in mind when using sockets with

CompactLogix 5370 controllers:
• A significant difference between CompactLogix 5370 controllers and
other Logix5000 controllers is the communication path.
CompactLogix 5370 controllers do not require a separate EtherNet/IP
network communication module, for example, a 1756-EN2T module.
In the case of the CompactLogix 5370 controllers, the MSG is sent to
the controller itself by using the path ‘1,0’.

• All CompactLogix 5370 controllers must use unconnected MSG

instructions for socket servers. When you configure a message for a
CompactLogix 5370 controller, make sure the Connected checkbox on
the Message Configuration dialog box is cleared.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Table 5 - Parameter Values for OpenConnection Service

Configuration Parameter Description
MSG Type CIP Generic
Service Type OpenConnection
Service Code 4c
Class 342
Instance from CreateSocket
Attribute 0
Source Element Application specific
Source Length

MSG Source Element

You must also create a user-defined data type (UDT) to use this service. This
example graphic shows the UDT screen. The parameter values for this MSG type
are defined in Table 6.

Table 6 - Parameter Values for OpenConnection Service

Configuration Parameter Element Description
Timeout DINT Specify the timeout in milliseconds.
DestAddr STRING Specify an array of characters (maximum of 64) to define
the destination of the connection. Specify one of the
following:
• Hostname?port=xxx
• IPAddr?port=xxx
For example, to specify an IP address, enter
10.88.81.10?port=2813
.LEN DINT The length of the destination address.
.DATA SINT array The array that contains the destination address.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 141

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

For more information on socket interface, see the following:

• EtherNet/IP Socket Interface Application Technique,

publication ENET-AT002

• Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library at http://

samplecode.rockwellautomation.com/

Quality of Service (QoS) and I/O Module Connections

CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Quality of Service (QoS) technology.
QoS lets the controller prioritize EtherNet/IP network traffic. By default, the
CompactLogix 5370 controllers are QoS-enabled. QoS can be disabled by
configuring a message instruction in the Logix Designer application.

Some EtherNet/IP devices do not support QoS technology unless the firmware
of the device is upgraded to a required minimum firmware revision level. For
example, the ControlLogix 1756-ENBT communication module must use
firmware revision 4.005 or later to support QoS technology.

To make sure communication between CompactLogix 5370 controllers and I/O

modules are maintained, verify that the EtherNet/IP devices use the minimum
firmware revision level of the product that is required to support QoS
technology.

For more information on the following, see Rockwell Automation

Knowledgebase Tech Note 66325 (the document is available at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase/):

• Minimum firmware revision levels of EtherNet IP devices to support QoS

technology

• Enable/disable QoS.

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

DeviceNet Network The CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers communicate with other devices
over the DeviceNet network via a Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner.
Communication The DeviceNet network uses the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) to provide
the control, configuration, and data collection capabilities for industrial devices.

IMPORTANT This section applies to applications using only CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3
controllers.
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers do not operate on DeviceNet networks.

Available Software
The software applications that are listed in this table are required when using a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller on a DeviceNet network.

Software Required Version Functions

RSLogix 5000 20.xx.xx - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers
using firmware revision 20.xxx.
Studio 5000 21.00.00 or later - For CompactLogix 5370 Configure the CompactLogix project
environment controllers using firmware revision 21.000 or
later.
RSLinx Classic 2.59.00 or later(1), (2) • Configure communication devices
• Provide diagnostics
• Establish communication between devices
RSNetWorx for One of the following: • Configure DeviceNet devices
DeviceNet • 11.00.00 or later if used with • Define the scanlist for the
RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx DeviceNet network
• 21.00.00 or later if used with
the Studio 5000 environment, version
21.00.00 or later
(1) CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers require RSLinx Classic software, version 2.59.01 or later.
(2) We recommend that you use RSLinx Classic software, version 3.51.00 or later, with the Studio 5000 environment, version 21.00.00
or later.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 143

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Figure 16 shows an example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system using a

DeviceNet network.

Figure 16 - Example 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System Using a DeviceNet Network

• 1769-L24ER-QB1B
DeviceNet Connection • 1769-SDN Scanner

1606-XLDNET E3 Overload Relay 1734-ADN POINT I/O

Figure 17 shows an example 1769-L33ERM using a DeviceNet network.

Figure 17 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a DeviceNet Network

• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-SDN Scanner

1606-XLDNET E3 Overload Relay 1734-ADN POINT I/O

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet Scanner

You connect a CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller to a DeviceNet network

via a Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner.

Before installing the scanner, consider the following:

• You can connect the scanner to an adjacent controller, power supply, or I/

O module.

• You must account for these two requirements jointly:

– Power Supply Distance Rating - Described on page 146
– Current Capacity in CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems -
Described on page 150

• The scanner, as a master, can own up to 63 slave I/O nodes.

• Another DeviceNet master can own a scanner that is simultaneously a

master and be a slave.

The scanner has this functionality:

• Supports messaging to devices, not controller to controller

• Supports control-level network to device-level network for programming,

configuration, control, or data collection

• Supports back up your CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller on the

DeviceNet network

For more information on using the 1769-SDN to back up your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller, see the 1769-SDN DeviceNet
Scanner Module User Manual, publication 1769-UM009.

• Shares a common application layer with EtherNet/IP networks

• Offers diagnostics for improved data collection and fault detection

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 145

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 control systems allow you to install 1769-SDN

scanners as local expansion modules. The 1769-SDN scanner has a power supply
distance rating that you must consider before installing it.

Power supply distance rating is the number of slots a 1769-SDN scanner can be
installed away from the power supply. The 1769-SDN scanner has a power supply
distance rating of four. Therefore, your CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 control
system can include up to three modules between the 1769-SDN scanner and the
power supply.

The power supply distance rating of the 1769-SDN scanner as a design

consideration differs by CompactLogix L2 controller catalog number.

CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems

In a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, you can install a 1769-SDN scanner

on the right side of the control system. The controller has an embedded power
supply, which disallows the installation of 1769-SDN scanners between the
controller and the power supply.

Additionally, the controller has embedded I/O modules that disallow installation
of the 1769-SDN scanner directly to the right of the embedded power supply.
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems have one or two embedded I/O
modules, described as follows:

• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller - One embedded I/O module

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers - Two

embedded I/O modules

While the embedded I/O modules are not considered local expansion modules,
you must still include each embedded I/O module in the module slot count when
determining where to install the 1769-SDN scanner as a local expansion module.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

The farthest local expansion module slot where you can install the 1769-SDN
scanner in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system is module slot number two
or three as determined by the controller catalog number that is used in the
control system.

Table 7 describes the farthest local expansion module slot where you can install a
1769-SDN scanner and meet its power supply distance rating requirement.
Table 7 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-SDN Scanner
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-SDN Scanner Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QB1B 1 The embedded I/O module is the first module in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating, the
1769-SDN scanner can be installed in slot 3 of the local expansion modules, as shown in the following graphic.

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-SDN scanner.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install up to two local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-SDN scanner.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 147

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Table 7 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-SDN Scanner

Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-SDN Scanner Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B 2 The embedded I/O modules are the first two modules in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B the 1769-SDN scanner can be installed in slot 2 of the local expansion modules, as shown in the following graphic.

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-SDN scanner.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install one local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-SDN scanner.

IMPORTANT When counting I/O modules to determine the 1769-SDN scanner placement in
a 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B or 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system, the
embedded I/O module appearance is different between the physical
appearance and the appearance in the application of the module.
The physical appearance is shown in the previous graphic. The second module
is two rows of termination points below one set of status indicators.
In the application, the second embedded I/O module appears as two modules
in the Controller Organizer each with their own slot number, that is [2] and [3].
When the 1769-SDN scanner is installed in the farthest local expansion module
slot possible, that is the fourth module in the control system, it appears with a
[5] designation in the Controller Organizer, as shown in the following graphic.

Modules [2] and [3] are

shown separately but are
considered one module
when counting modules
to meet power supply
distance rating
requirements.

1769-SDN scanner is shown as module [5] in this location but considered the fourth module
when counting modules to meet power supply distance rating requirements.

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems do not have embedded I/O modules.

You begin counting local expansion slots with the first Compact I/O module
installed next to the power supply when determining where to install a
1769-SDN scanner and meet its power supply distance rating.

In CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, you can install 1769-SDN scanners

to the left or right side of the power supply. You can also use local and extra banks
in CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, with each allowing the inclusion of a
1769-SDN scanner.

In the local bank, the controller must be the leftmost device in the system and
you can only install up to three modules between the controller and the power
supply. Therefore, any 1769-SDN scanners that are installed to the left of the
power supply in the local bank, are in a module slot that meets the power supply
distance rating requirements of the module.

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems also support the use of extra banks for
the local expansion modules of the system. Each additional bank requires a 1769
Compact I/O power supply. The bank can be designed with local expansion
modules on either side of the power supply.

In this case, you must install the 1769-SDN scanner with no more three
Compact I/O modules between the scanner and the power, regardless of whether
the modules are installed to the left or right of the power supply.

This graphic shows 1769-SDN scanners that are installed in a 1769-L36ERM

control system that meet the power supply distance rating of the module.

Local Bank

1769-SDN Scanner Installed in a 1769-L36ERM Control System Meeting the

Power Supply Distance Rating Requirements of the Scanner

Extra Bank

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 149

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Current Capacity in CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

In a local or extra bank, the modules that are installed on either side of the power
supply cannot draw more current than the power supply can supply. This
requirement partially dictates module placement on the bank.

For example, if a bank uses a 1769-PA2 Compact I/O power supply, each side of
the bank has a current capacity of 1A at 5V DC and 0.4A at 24V DC. Because a
1769-SDN scanner has a current draw of 440 mA at 5 V DC and 0 mA at 24 V
DC, you can only install up to two scanners on each side of the power supply in
the bank in this case.

For more information on 1769 Compact I/O power supply maximum current
capacity and calculations you can use to design the modules that are used in local
or extra banks, see Calculate System Power Consumption on page 249.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014

 Chapter 7

Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370

L1 Controllers

This chapter explains how to use I/O modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L1

control system.

Topic Page
Select I/O Modules 151
Validate I/O Layout 170
Use the Event Task 175
Configure I/O 179
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 181
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 181
Monitor I/O Modules 184

Select I/O Modules CompactLogix 5370 L1 control systems offer these I/O module options:
• Embedded I/O Modules
• Local Expansion Modules
• Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 151

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Connect Field Power to I/O Devices Connected to a CompactLogix

5730 L1 Control System
Chapter 1, Connect Power to the Controller (Series B) on page 30, describes
how to connect a dedicated, Class 2/SELV-listed external 24V DC power source
to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals on the removable connector that is shown in
the following graphic. Those connections provide power to only the system-side
of the embedded I/O and local expansion I/O modules.

IMPORTANT You must connect a separate external power source to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on the removable connector on the controller to power the field-side
circuitry of the embedded I/O modules and the local expansion modules for
only series A L1 controllers. See Appendix C for further information.

Power connections to the FP+ and FP- terminals provides power to input and
output devices that are connected to the embedded I/O modules or local
expansion modules of the controller. For example, input or output devices, such
as a barcode scanner.

The embedded I/O of the controller and the field-side power of the local
expansion modules is 24V DC nominally with an input range of 10…28.8V DC.

The following graphic shows the removable connector.

IMPORTANT The controller is grounded once it is installed on a DIN rail as described in

Mount the System on page 24.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect a 24V DC power source to power

input or output devices that are connected to the embedded I/O or local
expansion modules of the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller via FP+ and
FP- terminals.

For information on how to connect 24V DC power to the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and the POINTBus backplane via
VDC+ and VDC- terminals on the removable connector, see page 30.

• The external 24V DC power source that is connected to the FP+ and FP-
terminals must be separate from the power source that is dedicated to
power the controller via the VDC+ and VDC- terminals for only series A
controllers (see Appendix C).

• You can use the external 24V DC power source that provides power to the
FP+ and FP- terminals to power other components or devices in the
application.

• The external 24V DC power source that provides power to the FP+ and
FP- terminals can be installed on the same DIN rail as the external
24V DC power source that provides power to the VDC+ and VDC-
terminals or you can install the external 24V DC power sources on
separate DIN rails.

• Use a power source that most effectively meets your application needs.
That is, calculate the power requirements of your application before
choosing a power source to avoid using a power source that far exceeds
your application requirements:

– Limit field power current to 3 A or use a 1734-FPD module to avoid

blowing the internal fuse.
– Install a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent protection of 4…6 A @
52.5…68.25 A2t in line between the incoming power and the FP+
terminal.

• This section assumes that any DIN rail you use has been grounded
following Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
publication 1770-4.1.

• For example purposes, this section describes how to use a 1606-XLE80E,

Class 2 switched-mode power supply with the FP+ and FP- terminals. The
exact steps for other external power supplies can vary from the steps that
are described here.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 153

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

IMPORTANT Do not use the following steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370
series A L1 controller. See Appendix C for steps to connect power to the
CompactLogix 5370 series A L1 controller. The steps in Appendix C provide an
optional way to connect power to a series B L1 controller.

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

1. Verify that the separate external 24V DC power source that powers the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller is not powered.
2. Connect wires to the + and - connections on the external 24V DC power
source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

3. Loosen the screws that secure the removable connector to the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and pull the connector off the
controller.
Wires that are connected between external
24V DC power source and VDC+ and VDC-
terminals on the removable connector.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

4. Connect the wire that is connected to the + terminal on the external 24V
DC power source to the FP+ terminal, that is, the fourth terminal from
the top, on the removable connector.

5. Connect the wire that is connected to the - terminal on the external 24V
DC power source to the FP- terminal, that is the fifth terminal from the
top, on the removable connector.

6. Plug the removable connector into the controller.

7. Secure the removable connector in place.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 155

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

8. Turn on power to the separate external 24V DC power source connected

to the removable connector.

The following graphic shows separate external 24V DC power supply that is
connected to the VDC+/VDC- and FP+/FP- terminals on the removable
connector, respectively.

IMPORTANT: No wires are

connected to the NC terminal.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Embedded I/O Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers provide an embedded power supply and an

embedded I/O module with these points:
• 16 sinking 24V DC digital input points
• 16 sourcing 24V DC digital output points

The following diagram shows the wiring terminals on the embedded

I/O module.

Consider the following when you connect input or output devices to the
embedded I/O modules of your CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller:

• You must connect an external 24V DC power source to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on the removable connector on the controller to power input
and output devices that are connected to the embedded I/O modules on
the controller:

– Series A controllers require an extra external 24V DC power source for

the FP+ and FP- terminal connections. For more information on how
to connect an extra external power source for series A L1 controller to
the FP+ and FP- terminals, see Appendix C.
– Series B controllers use the external 24V DC power source that is
connected to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals on the controller for the
FP+ and FP- terminal connections. Series B controllers can also use an
extra external 24V DC power source for the FP+ and FP- terminal
connections. See Appendix C for more information on how to connect
the extra external power source to the FP+ and FP- terminals. For more
information on how to connect the external power source to the FP+
and FP- terminals on the series B controller, see page 154.

The field-side power requirement of the embedded I/O modules of the

controller is 24V DC nominally with an input range of 10…28.8V DC.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 157

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

• The available RPI range of the I/O points is 1.0 ms…750.0 ms and can be
changed by 0.5 ms increments. The default setting is 20 ms.

IMPORTANT • If you attempt to use an RPI value that is not valid, the application
automatically rounds the value down to the closest 0.5 ms
increment when you apply the change.
For example, if you set the RPI = 1.75 ms, when you click Apply or
OK, the value is rounded down to 1.5 ms and applied.

• The RPI value for embedded I/O module is intended to establish a

time interval at which data is transmitted. However, the
configuration of your CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system can
affect the actual time interval of data transmission.
For more information, see Estimate Requested Packet Interval on
page 172.

Complete these steps to wire the input and output points on the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to push the spring release clip and insert the wire.

3. With the wire in place, pull the screwdriver off the spring release clip.
4. Repeat step 2 for all embedded I/O wires that are needed in your
application.

To remove a wire from the removable connector, complete these steps.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to push the spring release clip and pull out the wire.

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Remove and Replace and I/O Module Connector

Complete these steps to remove and replace and I/O module connector.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to loosen the screws that secure the connector to
the module.

3. Pull the connector out from the I/O module to remove it.
4. Disconnect any wires from the connector.
5. Connect any wires to the replacement connector.
6. Push the replacement connector back into the I/O module.
7. Secure the connector to the I/O module with the small screwdriver.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 159

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Embedded Input Points

The embedded input points on the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support

2-wire and 3-wire input devices. You can wire the input devices to be powered in
one of the following methods:

• By using an external power supply, as shown in Figure 18 - In this case,

you can monitor the input devices even if field power is interrupted, for
example, by the MCR.

This method is required if you must continue reading data from the input
devices when the embedded output terminals are disabled, for example,
when the use of a Master Control Relay (MCR) disrupts output power.

• By using the V terminal on the embedded I/O module, as shown in

Figure 20 - In this case, you cannot monitor the input devices even if field
power is interrupted, for example, by the MCR.

Figure 18 and Figure 19 show examples of how to power 2-wire and 3-wire input
devices in your application.

IMPORTANT When using Figure 18 and Figure 19, use the following guidelines:
• With this wiring configuration, you can monitor the input devices even if
field power is interrupted, for example, by the MCR. The FP- connection
must be maintained as a reference for inputs to function.
• With this wiring configuration, the controller does not help protect field-
side devices from overcurrent draw conditions.
• Design your application so that power consumption does not exceed the
power supply ratings.
• The following figure is a wiring example that complies with the National
Electrical Code (NEC) standard for isolation between system and field
power.
• The FP+ terminal on the removable connector is the voltage connection.
• The FP- terminal on the removable connector is the common connection.
• The MCR must be closed for the removable connector to provide power to
the embedded I/O module.
• Install a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent protection of 4…6 A @
52.5…68.25 A2t in line between the incoming power and the FP+
terminal.
For series A L1 controllers only, you must use a separate, dedicated Class 2
power supply for the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and a separate power
supply for the embedded I/O module (see Appendix C).

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Figure 18 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers with Input Devices Powered by External

Power Supplies (Series A [Alternate Series B])

Power
Supply 1

MCR

Power 2-wire Prox 3-wire Prox

Supply 2

Figure 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers with Input Devices Powered by External Power
Supplies (Series B)

MCR

Power 2-wire Prox 3-wire Prox

Supply

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 161

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Figure 20 and Figure 21 shows examples of how to power 2-wire and 3-wire input
devices in your application with connections to a V terminal.

IMPORTANT When using Figure 20 and Figure 21, use the following guidelines:
• With this wiring configuration, the input devices lose power if the
removable connector does not power the embedded I/O modules.
• With this wiring configuration, the controller does not help protect field-
side devices from overcurrent draw conditions.
• Design your application so that power consumption does not exceed the
power supply ratings.
• The following figure is a wiring example that complies with the National
Electrical Code (NEC) standard for isolation between system and field
power.
• The FP+ terminal on the removable connector is the Voltage connection.
• The FP- terminal on the removable connector is the Common connection.
• The MCR must be closed for the removable connector to provide power to
the embedded I/O module.
• Install a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent protection of 4…6 A in
line between the incoming power and the FP+ terminal.
For series A L1 controllers only, you must use a separate, dedicated Class 2
power supply for the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and a separate power
supply for the embedded I/O module (see Appendix C).

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Figure 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers with Input Devices Powered by a V Terminal on

Embedded I/O Module (Series A [Alternate Series B])

Power
Supply 1

MCR

Power 2-wire Prox 3-wire Prox

Supply 2

Figure 21 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers with Input Devices Powered by a V Terminal on

Embedded I/O Module (Series B)

MCR

Power
Supply

2-wire Prox 3-wire Prox

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 163

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Embedded Output Points

The embedded output points on the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support

2-wire systems. The embedded power supply in the controller powers the
embedded output points over the POINTBus backplane.

The following graphic shows examples of how to connect 2-wire systems to

embedded output points 0…7. The same wiring connections can be used with
output points 8…15.

IMPORTANT Do not exceed the per point output current rating or total output module
current rating.

Figure 22 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Embedded Digital Output Point Wiring Diagram

Load
Load

Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

The following graphic shows an example of how to connect 2-wire systems to

embedded output points 0…4 and use an external terminal block with a bus
connector strip.

IMPORTANT Do not exceed the per point output current rating or total output module
current rating.

Figure 23 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Embedded Digital Output Point Wiring Diagram

Load
Load
Load
Load
Load

Terminal Block with Bus Connector Strip

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 165

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Local Expansion Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support the use of 1734 POINT I/O

modules as local expansion modules along the POINTBus backplane.

IMPORTANT For a full description of how to use 1734 POINT I/O modules, see the POINT I/O
Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O Modules, publication
1734-UM001.

Consider the following when using local expansion modules:

• The controllers support this many local expansion modules.
Table 8 - Maximum 1734 POINT I/O Modules Available as Local Expansion Modules
Cat. No. Local 1734 POINT I/O Modules Supported, max
1769-L16ER-BB1B 6
1769-L18ER-BB1B 8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B

• You can use up to the maximum number of 1734 POINT I/O modules
with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers that are listed in Table 8, as
long as the total current drawn by the embedded I/O and local expansion
modules does not exceed the available POINTBus backplane current of 1
A and field power current of 3 A.

IMPORTANT Do not put more than three of the 1734-IT2I or 1734-IR2 modules on
the POINT I/O bus that draws power from the same power source. This
includes power sources such as from communication adapters or the
1734-EPAC or 1734-EP24DC expansion power supply modules. The
inrush current will exceed the current limit of the DC to DC converter in
the power source.

Based on the configuration of your application, you can use one of the
following devices to make more POINTBus backplane current or field
power current available:

– 1734-EP24DC POINT I/O Expansion Power Supply - An

expansion power supply is installed between embedded I/O modules
and local expansion modules or between local expansion modules.

The expansion power supply breaks the available POINTBus

backplane current between the modules to its left and right. With the
expansion power supply installed, the modules to its left can draw up to
1 A of POINTBus backplane current and the modules to its right can
draw as much current as is provided by the expansion power supply.

Additionally, the expansion power supply breaks the available field

power current between the modules to its left and right. With the
expansion power supply installed, the modules to its left can draw up to

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

3 A of field power current and the modules to its right can draw as
much field power current as allowed by the expansion power supply.

For example, if you need six 1734-IR2 modules as local expansion

modules for a 1769-L18ER-BB1B controller application, you must
include the 1734-EP24DC expansion power supply in the local
expansion-module installation.

For more information on the 1734-EP24DC expansion power supply,

see the POINT I/O 24V DC Expansion Power Supply Installation
Instructions, publication 1734-IN058.
– 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power Distributor Module - A field
power distributor module can also be installed between embedded I/O
modules and local expansion modules or between local expansion
modules.

The field power distributor module breaks the available field power
current between the modules to its left and right. With the field power
distributor module installed, the modules to its left can draw up to 3 A
of field power current, and the modules to its right can draw as much
field power current as allowed by the field power distributor.

For more information on the 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power

Distributor module, see the POINT I/O Field Power Distributor
Module Installation Instructions, publication 1734-IN059.

IMPORTANT Remember, the field power distributor module changes only the level
of field power current available in the system. It does not affect the
level of POINTBus backplane current available.

• You must connect an external 24V DC power source to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on the removable connector on the controller to provide power
to input and output devices that are connected to the local expansion
modules.

– Series A controllers require an extra external 24V DC power source for

the FP+ and FP- terminal connections. For more information on how
to connect an extra external power source for series A L1 controller to
the FP+ and FP- terminals, see Appendix C.
– Series B controllers use the external 24V DC power source that is
connected to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals on the controller for the
FP+ and FP- terminal connections. Series B controllers can also use an
extra external 24V DC power source for the FP+ and FP- terminal
connections.

IMPORTANT Install a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent protection of 4…6 A

in line between the incoming power and the FP+ terminal.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 167

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

The field-side power requirement of the local exapansion modules of the

controller is 24V DC nominally with an input range of 10…28.8V DC.

For more information on how to connect a power source to the FP+ and
FP- terminals, see page 152.

• We recommend that you make sure all 1734 POINT I/O modules that
you intend as local expansion modules are upgraded to the most current
firmware revision before installing them in a CompactLogix 5370 L1
control system.

• The available RPI range of each local expansion module is 1.0…750.0 ms

and can be changed by 0.5 ms increments. The default setting is module-
dependent.

You can configure RPI values for each local expansion module in your
control system. However, the complete I/O configuration has an impact
on the rate at which data is transmitted in a CompactLogix 5370 L1
control system. For more information, see Estimate Requested
Packet Interval on page 172.

• Before installing a 1734 POINT I/O module into a CompactLogix 5370

L1 control system, make sure the I/O module is set to Autobaud. 1734
POINT I/O modules are set to Autobaud by default.

If you must return a 1734 POINT I/O module to Autobaud, see the
POINT I/O Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O
Modules, publication 1734-UM001.

• When possible, use specialty 1734 POINT I/O modules to meet unique
application requirements.

• Make sure that there are no empty slots between the controller and local
expansion modules or between local expansion modules.

• The Expansion I/O parameter in the project of the controller must match
the number of local expansion modules that are installed in the system for
the controller to establish connections to the local expansion modules.

• You must use a 1734-232ASC, firmware revision 4.002 or later, to access

an RS-232 network in your CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller
application.

IMPORTANT Field power is required for the 1734-232ASC module. The module
cannot receive adequate power without the application of field power.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Consider the following when using distributed I/O modules over an

EtherNet/IP network:

• Each remote EtherNet/IP adapter included in the system must be counted

toward the maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes of the controller.

For more information on maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes, see

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 130.

• The configurable RPI settings vary depending on which distributed I/O

modules are used in the system.

• To add distributed I/O modules to your CompactLogix 5370 L1 control

system, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 181.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system that uses
all three I/O module options.

Local Expansion Modules

Embedded I/O Module

Distributed I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 169

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Validate I/O Layout You must validate the layout of 1734 POINT I/O modules in your
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system. Consider these points when validating
I/O layout placement:
• Set the Number of Local Expansion Modules
• Empty Slots and Removal and Insertion Under Power Situations
• Estimate Requested Packet Interval
• Module Faults Related to RPI Estimates
• Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Set the Number of Local Expansion Modules

You must specify the number of local expansion modules to be used in a

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system when creating project, as shown in the
following graphic, or when the number of local expansion modules is changed.

Each time the controller is powered up, it compares the number of local
expansion modules present on the POINTBus backplane to the Expansion I/O
value. The controller does not allow any I/O connections until the number of
local expansion modules present equals the Expansion I/O value.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Empty Slots and Removal and Insertion Under Power Situations

The POINT I/O system cannot detect an empty terminal base. For this reason,
there are numerous situations in which you can potentially configure a system
that is unusable or one that exercises unintended control.

Follow these rules for I/O system configuration and RIUP of I/O modules.

WARNING: If you insert or remove the module while backplane power

is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in
hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

IMPORTANT 1734 POINT I/O modules support RIUP in CompactLogix 5370 L1

control systems.

• A correct I/O system does not have any empty terminal bases. If necessary,
you can use a 1734-ARM POINT I/O Address Reserve module to replace
a 1734 POINT I/O module in a CompactLogix 5370 control system.

• After you cycle power, the controller only enables I/O connections if the
number of local expansion modules present on POINTBus matches the
value that is used for the Expansion I/O parameter in the project.

• If a 1734 POINT I/O module is removed under power, the operation of

the other I/O modules is not disrupted.

• When you remove an I/O module that has an active connection from the
controller, the controller I/O status indicator flashes green to indicate the
condition.

IMPORTANT If you enabled the 'Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While
in Run Mode' parameter when configuring the module in the
Studio 5000 environment project, removal of the module causes the
controller to transition to a major fault condition.

• If multiple contiguous modules are removed under power, connections to

all modules in the contiguous missing module set are disallowed until all
modules are replaced. The controller cannot detect an empty base.
Therefore, it does not know the physical positioning of the modules until
all missing modules are replaced.

• If a module that separates two sets of contiguous missing modules is

removed, the two sets merge into one set. All modules must be replaced
before connections are permitted to any module in the set.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 171

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

• If modules of different types are removed and returned to the wrong

locations, attempts to connect to these modules fail during verification of
Electronic Keying.

IMPORTANT If Electronic Keying is set to Disable Keying, no verification of electronic

keying occurs and unintended control can occur.

• If modules of the same type are removed and returned to the wrong
locations, they accept connections from the controller and reconfigure
with the correct data once they pass their electronic keying check.

Estimate Requested Packet Interval

The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the
controller sends data to and receives data from I/O modules. You set an RPI rate
for each I/O module in your system.

The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers attempt to scan an I/O module at the

configured RPI rate. For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap minor
fault occurs if there are enough I/O modules with RPI rates set too fast that they
cannot all be serviced in the allotted interval.

The configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on actual RPI
rates. These configuration factors can affect the effective scan frequency for any
individual module:
• Other 1734 POINT I/O module RPI rate settings
• Number of other 1734 POINT I/O modules in the system
• Types of other 1734 POINT I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

In general, follow these guidelines when setting the RPI rates in a

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system:
• For digital I/O modules:
– 1…2 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
– 3…4 modules can be scanned in 4 ms.
– 5…8 modules can be scanned in 8 ms.

IMPORTANT When considering digital I/O modules, remember that they can be the
embedded I/O module on the controller or 1734 POINT I/O modules
that are used as Local Expansion Modules. Therefore, the consideration
for using two modules can be the embedded I/O module and a 1734
POINT I/O module or two 1734 POINT I/O modules.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

• For specialty and analog I/O modules (except 1734-485ASC modules):

– One module can be scanned at 20 ms.
– For each additional module, add 20 ms.
For example, if a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system uses two analog
modules, the module can be scanned in 40 ms.

• For 1734-485ASC modules, the total data size for all ASC modules
determines the RPI rates:
– For total data size less than 20 bytes, each module can be scanned
in 20 ms.
– For data size greater than 20 bytes, use the size value as the RPI.
For example, if the total data size is 40 bytes, each ASC module can be
scanned in 40 ms.

You are not required to set individual RPI values of 1734 POINT I/O modules
to the values listed previously. For example, if your application scans one or two
modules, you do not have to use RPI rates of 2 ms. Remember, though, that
higher RPI rates result in less frequent data scans.

The RPI shows how quickly modules can be scanned, not how quickly an
application can use the data. The RPI is asynchronous to the program scan.
Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O throughput.

Module Faults Related to RPI Estimates

When following the guidelines described on page 172, most

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control systems operate as expected.

Some systems that follow the guidelines can experience minor faults that are
described in the following table.

Name Fault Condition In Which Fault Occurs

Information
Module (Type 03) I/O fault This fault is logged when the current RPI update of an I/O module overlaps with its
RPI (Code 94) Module previous RPI update. The Minor Faults tab in the Controller Properties dialog box
Overlap RPI overlap indicates which module the RPI overlaps.
detected If multiple I/O modules experience the fault, the application indicates that the fault
Module Slot = x, occurred on the first such I/O module. Typically, it is an I/O module with a lower RPI
where x is the slot rate and/or an I/O module with large input/output data sizes. For example, the
number of the I/O 1734-232ASC and 1734-485ASC modules use large input/output data sizes.
module in the I/O Once the fault is cleared from the first I/O module, the application indicates the
Configuration next module that experiences the fault. This pattern continues until the fault is
section cleared from all affected I/O modules.
To avoid this fault, set the RPI rate of the I/O modules to a higher numerical value.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 173

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Calculate System Power Consumption

An embedded 24V DC nominal, non-isolated power supply with an input range

of 10…28.8V DC powers the CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

The embedded power supply provides 1 A @ 5V DC to the POINTBus

backplane to power all system components, including local expansion modules,
that is 1734 POINT I/O modules, in most system configurations.

In some circumstances, you can configure a system that requires more current
than the embedded power supply of the system provides. This type of
configuration results from using a combination of local expansion modules that,
when combined with current consumption of the rest of the system, exceeds
1 A @ 5V DC.

In this case, you can take any of the following actions to make sure that your
system configuration has enough power:

• Insert a 1734-EP24DC POINT I/O expansion power supply between

local expansion modules to increase the POINTBus backplane power.

• Insert a 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Potential Distribution module

between local expansion modules to renew field power or change the field
power from DC to AC, that is, separate DC I/O modules from AC I/O
modules on the same POINTBus.

IMPORTANT The 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power Distributor is required if the
devices connected to the local expansion modules consume more
than 3 A.

Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Before you physically install the I/O modules, you must assemble, mount, and
ground the system as described in Chapter 1, Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1
Controller on page 15.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Use the Event Task The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support the use of an Event task with
their embedded input points. You can configure embedded input point terminals
to trigger an Event task if a change of state (COS) occurs.

IMPORTANT When using the Event task with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers,
consider these points:
• You can use the Event task only with Logix Designer application, version
21.00.00 and later.
• You can use the Event task only with the embedded input points of the
controller. You cannot use the Event task with input points in the local
expansion modules, for example, a 1734-IB4 module.
• You can use the Event task only if the input point has an input data
state change.
• An event is recognized only when it maintains the same state for at least
the duration of the input filter time specified.
• Configure the Event task at a rate that stops task overlap conditions.
• Configure the Event task at a rate that is likely to succeed.
A 2 ms signal width is the minimum pulse width that can be used at which
the Event task succeeds.

You can configure multiple embedded input points to trigger an Event task.
However, we recommend that you enable COS for only one point. If you enable
COS for multiple points, a task overlap of the Event task can occur.

You can configure an Event task to trigger if one of these events occurs:
• An event occurs on one point on an input module.
• A trigger event does not occur in a time interval.

You configure whether the task updates output modules at the end of the task.
After the task executes, it does not execute again until the event occurs again.
Each Event task requires a trigger.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 175

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

The following table describes the triggers for an Event task available in a
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Trigger Description
Input Data State Change The input point triggers the Event task that is based on the change of state (COS)
configuration for the point. The COS configuration is set on the Module Definition
dialog box.
Consumed Tag Only one consumed tag can trigger an Event task. Use an Immediate Output (IOT)
instruction in the producing controller to signal the production of new data.
Axis Registration 1 or 2 A registration input triggers the Event task.
Axis Watch A watch position triggers the Event task.
Motion Group Execution The coarse update period for the motion group triggers the execution of the motion
planner and the Event task. Because the motion planner interrupts all other tasks, it
executes first.
EVENT Instruction Multiple EVENT instructions can trigger the same task.

For more information on Event tasks, see the following publications:

• Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual,
publication 1756-PM001
• Using Event Tasks with Logix5000 Controllers, publication
LOGIX-WP003

Complete the following steps to configure the Event task.

1. Open the project.

2. Right-click Embedded Discrete_IO and choose Properties.

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

3. On the Module Properties dialog box, complete the following steps.

a. Click the Input Configuration tab.
b. Enable COS for the digital input points on which a state change, that is,
Off to On or On to Off, triggers the Event task.
c. Set the desired input filter time for each COS-enabled input point.

IMPORTANT An event is recognized only when it maintains the same state for at
least the duration of the input filter time specified.

d. Click OK.

4. Right-click Tasks and choose New Task.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 177

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

5. On the New Task dialog box, complete the following steps.

a. Name the task.
b. Change the task type to Event.
c. Choose the trigger.
d. Select the tag.
e. If desired, set a time so the Event task executes if no event occurs with
the value.
On the following example dialog box, the time is 10 ms. If no event
occurs for 10 ms, the Event task executes.
f. Set the task priority.
The default Event task priority level is 10. For more information about
Event tasks, see Using Event Tasks with Logix5000 Controllers white
paper, LOGIX-WP003.

g. Make more desired configuration changes.

h. Click OK.

The new Event task appears in the Controller Organizer.

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Configure I/O Complete these steps to add a 1734 POINT I/O module to your
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

1. Right-click PointIO and choose New Module.

You can also right-click Expansion I/O.

2. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 179

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Common Configuration Parameters

While the configuration options vary from module to module, there are some
common options you typically configure when using 1734 POINT I/O modules
in a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system, as described in Table 9.
Table 9 - Common Configuration Parameters
Configuration Option Description
Requested packet interval (RPI) The RPI specifies the interval at which data is transmitted or received over a connection. For POINTBus backplane local expansion
modules, data is transmitted to the controller at the RPI.
When scanned on the local bus or over an EtherNet/IP network, I/O modules are scanned at the RPI specified in the module
configuration. Typically, you configure an RPI in milliseconds (ms).
• For local expansion modules, the range is 1.0…750 ms and the RPI must be configured in 0.5 ms increments. That is, you cannot set
the RPI to a value of 2.3 ms. It must be 2.0 or 2.5.
• For remote I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network, the range is 2.0…750 ms and the RPI must be configured in 1.0 ms
increments. That is, you cannot set the RPI to a value of 2.3 ms. It must be 2.0 or 3.0.
Module definition Set of configuration parameters that affect data transmission between the controller and the I/O module. The parameters include the
following:
• Series - Hardware series of the module.
• Revision - Major and minor firmware revision levels that are used on the module.
• Electronic Keying - See LOGIX-AT001 for Electronic Keying information.
• Connection - Type of connection between the controller that writes the configuration and the I/O module, such as Output.
• Data format - Type of data that is transferred between the controller and I/O module and what tags are generated when the
configuration is complete.
Major Fault on Controller If Connection This option determines how the controller is affected if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode or if the controller is unable to
Fails While in Run Mode establish a connection to the module. You can configure the project so that a connection failure causes a major fault on the controller or
not. The default setting is for the option to be disabled.
For example, if this option is enabled and an I/O module is removed while in Run mode, a major fault occurs on the controller. The default
setting for the embedded I/O module is that this option is enabled. The default setting for local expansion modules is that this option is
disabled.

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

I/O Connections

A CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system uses connections to transmit I/O data.

Table 10 describes the connection types.

IMPORTANT You can only use direct connections with the local expansion modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Table 10 - I/O Module Connections

Connection Description
Direct A direct connection is a real-time, data-transfer link between the controller and an I/O module. The controller maintains and monitors
the connection. Any break in the connection, such as a module fault, causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area that is
associated with the module.
Typically, analog I/O modules, diagnostic I/O modules, and specialty modules require direct connections.
Rack-optimized Rack-optimized connections are not available with local expansion modules used in CompactLogix 5370 L1 control systems. For digital
I/O modules, you can select rack-optimized connections.
This option is used with distributed I/O modules and the Rack Optimization connection selection is made when configuring the remote
adapter. For example, if you want to use a rack-optimized connection with digital I/O modules in a remote 1734 POINT I/O system, you
configure the 1734-AENT(R) module to use a connection type of Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection consolidates connection usage between the controller and all digital I/O modules in a remote chassis or on
one DIN rail. Rather than having individual, direct connections for each I/O module, there is one connection for the entire rack (or DIN
rail).

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
an EtherNet/IP network.
Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network
IMPORTANT When adding distributed I/O modules, remember to count the remote Ethernet
adapter to remain within the maximum number of EtherNet/IP network nodes
limitation for your controller.
The distributed I/O modules that are connected to the controller via the remote
Ethernet adapter are not counted toward the maximum Ethernet node limit for
the controller.
For example, a 1769-L16ER-BB1B controller supports up to four Ethernet
nodes. You can add up to four remote Ethernet adapters to the I/O
Configuration section because each remote adapter counts against the node
count. However, you can add as many remote I/O modules to the chassis of the
adapter as necessary. Remote I/O modules do not count against the node
count.
For more information on node limitations, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 130.

Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on an

EtherNet/IP network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 181

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

1. Right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new Ethernet adapter as necessary and click OK.

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

4. Right-click the new adapter and choose New Module.

5. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

6. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

7. Repeat these steps to add all desired distributed I/O modules to

the project.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 183

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system

that uses distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

1794-AENT FLEX I/O Adapter Connected 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter

via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules

PanelView Plus Terminal

Computer with Ethernet Port

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System

Kinetix 6500 Drive and Motor Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via a
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

Monitor I/O Modules With CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers, you can use the following options to
monitor I/O modules:

• Quick View Pane below the Controller Organizer

• Connection tab in the Module Properties dialog box

• Programming logic to monitor fault data so you can act

When a fault occurs on an I/O module, a yellow triangle on the module listing in
the Controller Organizer alerts you to the fault.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

The following graphic shows the Quick View Pane, which indicates the type of
fault.

To see the fault description on the Connection tab in Module Properties dialog
box, complete these steps.

1. In the I/O Configuration, right-click the faulted I/O module and

choose Properties.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 185

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

2. Click the Connection tab and use the fault description, in the Module
Fault section, to diagnose the issue.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and remedy the issue.

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Bus Off Detection and Recovery

When the POINTBus backplane experiences a bus off condition, the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller indicates this condition via a BUS OFF
minor fault (Type 03, Code 01). When this fault occurs, the connections
between the controller and I/O modules are broken.

Complete these steps to identify the source of the BUS OFF minor fault.

1. Make sure the number of local expansion modules in the project matches
the number of modules that are physically installed in the system.
2. Make sure that all mounting bases are locked and I/O modules are securely
installed on mounting bases.
3. Make sure all 1734 POINT I/O modules are configured to use the
Autobaud rate.

IMPORTANT You cannot change a 1734 POINT I/O module’s Autobaud setting when
the module is installed in a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.
If you must return a 1734 POINT I/O module to Autobaud, see the
POINT I/O Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O Modules,
publication 1734-UM001.

If these steps do not remedy the fault condition, contact Rockwell Automation
technical support.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 187

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Notes:

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 8

Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370

L2 Controllers

This chapter explains how to use I/O modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2

control system.

Topic Page
Select I/O Modules 189
Embedded Analog I/O Modules Data Arrays 209
Validate I/O Layout 223
Configure Local I/O Modules 229
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 232
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 232
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network 236
Monitor I/O Modules 238

Select I/O Modules CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems offer these I/O module options:
• Embedded I/O Modules
• Local Expansion Modules - Optional
• Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 189

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Embedded I/O Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers provide embedded I/O modules. The

catalog number determines the number and type of points. The following table
describes which embedded I/O modules CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers
support.

Cat. No. SInking/ Sinking High-speed High-speed Universal Analog

Sourcing 24V DC Counters Counter Analog Output
24V DC Digital Output Input Points
Digital Output Points Points
Input Points
Points
1769-L24ER-QB1B 16 16 - - - -
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B 4 4 4 2
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

IMPORTANT Remember the following when using the embedded I/O modules on
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers:
• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller - The digital input points and digital output
points are on one embedded I/O module. Therefore, the 1769-L24ER-QB1B
controller is considered to have one embedded I/O module.

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers - The digital

input points and digital output points are on one embedded I/O module.
The high-speed counter input output points, universal analog input points,
and analog output points are on another single embedded I/O module.
Therefore, the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers
are considered to have two embedded I/O modules.

You configure an RPI rate for the embedded I/O modules to establish time
intervals at which data is transmitted between the controller and each embedded
I/O point. The’ available RPI range of the embedded I/O points is
0.5…750.0 ms and can be changed by 0.5 ms increments. The default setting
is 20 ms.

IMPORTANT • If you attempt to use an RPI value that is not valid, the application
automatically rounds the value down to the closest 0.5 ms increment when
you apply the change.
For example, if you set the RPI = 1.75 ms, when you click Apply or OK, the
value is rounded down to 1.5 ms and applied.

• The RPI value for an embedded I/O module is intended to establish a time
interval at which data is transmitted. However, the configuration of your
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system can affect the actual time interval of
data transmission.
For more information, see Estimate Requested Packet Interval on page 223.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded Digital I/O Points

The embedded digital I/O module on CompactLogix 5370 L2 contains sixteen

24V DC sinking inputs and sixteen 24V DC sourcing outputs. The inputs can be
configured to use digital filtering by input group. Filter times can be specified for
OFF to ON and ON to OFF.

Group 0 is used to configure inputs 0…7. Group 1 is used to configure inputs

8…15. The default filter time for each group is 8 ms. You can the filter times to
0.0 ms, 0.1 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, and 4.0 ms, as shown in this graphic.

Figure 24 shows the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers’ embedded digital

I/O points.

IMPORTANT Figure 24 shows the embedded digital I/O points on the 1769-L24ER-QB1B
controller. The embedded digital I/O points on the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and wired the same.

Figure 24 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Digital I/O Module Wiring

Termination Points

Digital Input
Points

Digital Output
Points

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 191

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 25 shows an example wiring diagram for the embedded digital

input points.

Figure 25 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Digital Input Point Wiring Diagram

+ DC (Sinking)
- DC (Sourcing)

24V DC

- DC (Sinking)
+ DC (Sourcing)

Figure 26 shows an example wiring diagram for the embedded digital

output points.

Figure 26 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Digital Output Point Wiring Diagram

+ DC

24V DC

- DC

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded Analog I/O Points

IMPORTANT The embedded analog I/O points are available on only the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers.

The 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers support

four embedded universal analog inputs that can function as differential or single-
ended inputs and two embedded standard analog outputs that can function as
single-ended outputs. The inputs and outputs are considered channels. Each
channel configuration offers multiple configuration options.

Table 11 lists the available embedded analog input channel types and ranges for
the channel type. The configuration choices are made on the Input
Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box, as shown in the table.
Table 11 - Input Types
Input Type Input Ranges Project Configuration
Voltage • Type -50…50 mV
• Type -100…100 mV
• 0…5V
• 1…5V
• 0…10V
• -10V…10V
Current • 0…20 mA
• 4…20 mA
Thermocouple • J
• K at 1370…1372 °C
(2498…2501.6 °F)
• K at -200…1370 °C
(-328…2498 °F)
• T
• E
• S and R at 0…1768 °C
(32…3214.4 °F)
• S and R at -50…0 °C
(-58…32 °F)
• B at 300…1820 °C
(572…3308 °F)
• B at 250…300 °C (482…572 °F)
• N
• C
RTD • 100 Ω Platinum 385
• 200 Ω Platinum 385
• 500 Ω Platinum 385
• 1000 Ω Platinum 385
• 100 Ω Platinum 3916
• 200 Ω Platinum 3916
• 500 Ω Platinum 3916
• 1000 Ω Platinum 3916
• 10 Ω Copper 426
• 120 Ω Nickel 618
• 120 Ω Nickel 672
• 604 Ω Nickel-Iron 518
Resistance • 0…150 Ω
• 0…500 Ω
• 0…1000 Ω
• 0…3000 Ω

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 193

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 27 shows the embedded analog I/O points and how each termination
point is used with different analog input types.

IMPORTANT Figure 27 shows the embedded analog I/O points on the

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller. The embedded analog I/O points on the
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and
wired the same.

Figure 27 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Embedded Analog I/O Wiring Termination Points

Terminal Point Labels Terminal Point Labels

Thermocouple Input Type Connections RTD and Resistance Input Type Connections

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Figure 28 shows an example of ungrounded and grounded thermocouple wiring

diagrams on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 28 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Thermocouple Wiring Diagrams

Ungrounded Thermocouple Grounded Thermocouple

Earth Ground Earth Ground

IMPORTANT: You must order Cold Junction Connectors, catalog number

1769-CJC, separately from the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers.

Figure 29 shows an example of devices with differential connections wired to the

embedded analog inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller when it is
operating with voltage or current input types.

Figure 29 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Differential Connections Diagrams

Voltage Input Type Current Input Type

Differential Voltage Differential Current
Connections Connections

IMPORTANT: For both Differential Differential

Voltage Current
input types, we Transmitter Transmitter
recommend that you
use Belden #8761or
equivalent cable.

Earth Ground Earth Ground

Ground the shield Ground the shield
locally at the locally at the
module. module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 195

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 30 shows an example of devices with single-ended connections wired to

the embedded analog inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller when it is
operating with voltage or current input types.

Figure 30 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Single-ended Connections Wiring Diagrams

Voltage Input Type Current Input Type

Single-ended Voltage Single-ended Current
Connections Connections
IMPORTANT: For single-ended
connections, remember the
following: Voltage Transmitter Current Transmitter
• For both input types, we
Power Signal Signal Power
recommend that you use
Supply Ground Supply
Belden #8761or equivalent
cable.
• The mV ranges with the
Voltage input type do not
support single-ended
encoder wiring.
• All commons are electrically Earth Earth
tied together in the
controller.
• If multiple power supplies
are used, the commons
must have the same
reference.

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Figure 31 shows an example of 2-wire, 3-wire, and 4-wire RTD/Resistance wiring

diagrams on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 31 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B RTD/Resistance Wiring Diagrams

2-wire Device
Wiring Diagram

Earth

IMPORTANT: For all

wiring diagrams, we
recommend that you
use Belden #83503 or
9533 cable.

3-wire Device
Wiring Diagram

Earth

4-wire Device
Wiring Diagram

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 197

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 12 lists the available embedded analog output channel types and ranges for
the channel type. The configuration choices are made on the Output
Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box, as shown in the table.
Table 12 - Output Types
Output Type Output Project Configuration
Ranges
Voltage • -10…10V
• 0…5V
• 0…10V
• 1…5V
Current • 4…20 mA
• 0…20 mA

Figure 32 shows an example of wiring input devices to the analog output points
on the 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller when it is operating in voltage or
current mode.

Figure 32 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Analog Output Wiring Diagrams

Voltage Analog Current Analog

Output Wiring Output Wiring
Diagram Diagram

Voltage
Load
Current
Load

Earth Ground Earth Ground

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded High-speed Counters

IMPORTANT The embedded high-speed counters are available on only the 1769-L24ER-
QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers.

The 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers support

four embedded high-speed counters. Each counter is a differential input.
Therefore, two input terminals are required for one counter. For example, the
A0+ and A0- terminals are required for counter A0.

The L2 embedded high-speed counters operate like the 1769-HSC module. See
1769-UM006 for further information.

Each counter uses differential inputs that are compatible with standard
differential-line driver output devices and single-ended devices. Figure 33 shows
the embedded high-speed counter input points.

IMPORTANT Figure 33 shows the embedded high-speed counters on the 1769-L27ER-QB1B

controller. The embedded high-speed counter points on the 1769-L24ER-
QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and wired the
same.

Figure 33 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Embedded High-speed Counter Wiring

Termination Points

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 199

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 34 shows an example of a differential encoder that is wired to the

embedded high-speed counter inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 34 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Differential Encoder with High-speed Counter Input

Wiring Diagram

Cable

External
Power Shield
Supply
Earth

Shield/Housing
Only connect if housing is electronically
isolated from the motor and ground.

Figure 35 shows an example of a single-ended encoder that is wired to the

embedded high-speed counter inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 35 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Single-ended Encoder with High-speed Counter

Input Wiring Diagram

Cable

Shield
External
Power
Supply
Earth

Shield/Housing
Only connect if housing is electronically
isolated from the motor and ground.

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

The embedded high-speed counter also supports four output points. Figure 36
shows a wiring diagram for the embedded high-speed counter output points.

IMPORTANT Figure 36 shows the embedded high-speed counter output points on the
1769-L27ER-QB1B controller. The embedded high-speed counter points on the
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and
wired the same.

Figure 36 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Embedded High-speed Counter Output

Wiring Diagram

+DC

5/24V DC

-DC

Wiring the Embedded I/O Modules

Complete these steps to wire the input and output points on the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Strip 10 mm (0.39 in) insulation from the end of the wire.
3. Push the wire into the open terminal until it is secure.

If your wire is too thin to push into the open terminal for secure
placement, we recommend that you connect the wire to a ferrule and insert
it into the open terminal.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 201

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

4. Repeat step 3 for all embedded I/O wires that are needed in your
application.

To remove a wire from the removable connector, complete these steps.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to push the spring release clip and pull out the wire.

If any issues arise with a removable connector and you suspect a connection point
can no longer be functioning as a complete circuit, you can use a continuity tester
to determine if the connection point is operating correctly, that is, the connection
point is a complete circuit.

The indication mechanism, for example, a light that illuminates on the tester,
varies by continuity tester. The following example graphic shows a continuity
tester with one connection point. In this case, if the circuit is operating correctly,
the indicator light turns on.

Insert a continuity tester into the suspected I/O connection point as shown in
the following graphic.

Continuity Tester

Small hole on
opposite from
termination point
in removable
connector.

Remove and Replace the Connector

Complete these steps to remove and replace an embedded I/O module

connector.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

2. Compress the small release clips at the top and bottom of the connecter
and tilt the top of the connector away from the module.

3. Pull the connector away from the module and disconnect any wires.
4. Connect the wires to the replacement connector.
5. Push the connector back into the module and engage the clips to secure it.

Determine Embedded This section applies to the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

IMPORTANT
Module Update Time because only those controllers have and embedded universal analog
input points.

The module update time is the time that is required for the module to sample and
convert the input signals of all enabled analog input channels and provide the
resulting data values to the controller.

The module update time is calculated by adding the update times for each
enabled analog input channel on the module. Each channel update time
calculation is the result of several configuration choices that are described in the
following section.

Channel Update Times

Some combination of the following times determines the channel update time for
an enabled analog input channel:

• Channel Input Type and Filter Frequency Selection Update Time -

Required for channel update time calculation

• Cold Junction Compensation Update Times - Optional for channel

update time calculation time

• Open Circuit Detection Update Time - Optional for channel update time
calculation time

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 203

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Channel Input Type and Filter Frequency Selection Update Time

When you enable an embedded analog input channel, you must select an input
type and a filter frequency for that input. The selections that are made determine
the value that is required when calculating channel update time.

IMPORTANT Each channel input type has multiple ranges or types. For example, a voltage
input type can use one of six voltage ranges, as listed in Table 11 on page 193.
Regardless of which voltage range the channel uses, the channel update time
remains the same. For more information, see Table 13.

Table 13 shows the channel update times for each channel input type and filter
frequency selection.
Table 13 - Channel Update Times
Channel Update Times Based on Input Type Selection
Filter Frequency Voltage, Current or Resistance or RTD Input
Selection(1) Thermocouple Input Type Type
10 Hz 307 ms 614 ms
50 Hz 67 ms 134 ms
60 Hz 57 ms 114 ms
250 Hz 19 ms 38 ms
500 Hz 13 ms 26 ms
1 kHz 11 ms 22 ms
(1) Filter frequency selections are made on the Input Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box.

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Cold Junction Compensation Update Times

When you use any of the thermocouple input types on your embedded analog
input, you must account for more voltage at the junction of the thermocouple
field wires and the input point. More voltage can alter the input signal on that
point and, therefore, affect the update time of that channel.

The process to account for increased voltage at an input point by using a

thermocouple type input is cold junction compensation (CJC). You enable CJC
for a given channel on the Input Configuration tab of the Module Configuration
dialog box, as shown in the following graphic.

By default, CJC is disabled. You must clear the Disable Cold Junction
Compensation checkbox to use CJC for a given channel.

You are not required to enable CJC for a channel by using the thermocouple
input type. If you enable CJC and select Update Cold Junction Compensation
every other scan, an extra update time exists on the channel. This extra update
time increases the overall channel update time.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 205

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

The filter frequency selection for the channel determines the CJC update time.
Table 14 shows the CJC update times that are based on filter
frequency selections.
Table 14 - Channel Update Times
Filter Frequency Selection(1) CJC Update Time
10 Hz 614 ms
50 Hz 134 ms
60 Hz 114 ms
250 Hz 38 ms
500 Hz 26 ms
1 kHz 22 ms
(1) Filter frequency selections are made on the Input Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box.

IMPORTANT Keep the following in mind when calculating the CJC update time:
• If multiple input channels are configured to use a thermocouple input type
and another filter value is selected for each, the filter frequency selection
with the slowest update time determines the filter frequency selection
with the slowest update time determines the CJC update time.
For example, if one input channel uses a thermocouple input with a 50 Hz
filter frequency and another input channel uses a thermocouple input with
a 60 Hz filter frequency, the CJC channel update time is 134 ms.
• The CJC update time that increases overall module update time is only used
once regardless of the number of input channels on a module that have CJC
enabled to scan every other scan.
In other words, if your module uses a filter frequency selection of 250 Hz
and includes three channels with CJC enabled to scan every other scan, you
only add one instance of CJC update time to the overall equation. Instead of
including 38 ms for each channel, you include 38 ms once.

Open Circuit Detection Update Time

Open circuit detection is used to verify that the field wiring is physically
connected to the embedded analog input point. If this feature is enabled and field
wiring is disconnected from the input, the application alerts you to the condition
and an open wire bit is set for the respective input channel in the tags for the
project.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Open circuit detection can be enabled or disabled on any channel input type
except for an input channel that is configured to use the 0…20 mA input range.
The configuration selection is made on the Input Configuration tab on the
Module Properties dialog box, as shown in the following graphic. The
configuration choice, that is, enabled or disabled, is the result of an Open Circuit
Response selection for the channel.

To disable open circuit detection, choose Disable. To enable open circuit

detection, choose any of the other four options.

Table 15 describes the module response that is associated with each enable
selection.
Table 15 - Open Circuit Detection Response Definitions
Response Option Definition
Upscale Sets the input data value to full upper-scale value of channel data word. The selected input
type and data format determines the full-scale value.
Downscale Sets the input data value to full lower-scale value of channel data word. The selected input
type and data format determines the low scale value.
Last State Sets the input data value to the last input value before the detection of the open-circuit.
Zero Sets the input data value to 0 to force the channel data word to 0.

When you enable open circuit detection for an input channel, an extra update
time is used to calculate the overall channel type. The increase in channel update
time is 11 ms for each channel that enables open circuit detection response.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 207

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 16 lists example module update times that are based on channel
configurations.
Table 16 - Example Module Update Times
Example Enabled Analog Input Channel Update Time Calculations Module
Channel Configuration Update
Time
• Channel 0: 57 ms 57 ms
– Input type = Current
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
• Channel 0: Channel 0 update time + Channel 1 update time 171 ms
– Input type = Current 57 ms + 114 ms
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
• Channel 1:
– Input type = RTD
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
• Channel 0: Channel 0 update time + Channel 1 update time 682 ms
– Input type = Voltage (57 ms + 11 ms) + 614 ms
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled
• Channel 1:
– Input type = RTD
– Filter Frequency Selection = 10 Hz
• Channel 0: Channel 0 update time + Channel 1 update time + 898 ms
– Input type = Voltage Channel 2 update time + Channel 3 update time +
– Filter Frequency Selection = 50 Hz CJC Update Time
• Channel 1: 67 ms + (614 ms + 11 ms) + (57 ms + 11 ms)
– Input type = RTD + (13 ms + 11 ms) + 114 ms
– Filter Frequency Selection = 10 Hz
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled
• Channel 2
– Input type = Thermocouple
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
– CJC = Enabled
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled
• Channel 3:
– Input type = Thermocouple
– Filter Frequency Selection = 500 Hz
– CJC = Enabled
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded Analog I/O The section describes the data table structures for the embedded analog I/O
modules on the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers. The embedded analog I/O
Modules Data Arrays modules have arrays for the following data:
• Input data
• Output data
• Configuration data

You can access the data via the tags in the application.

IMPORTANT The analog I/O modules data structures apply to only the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers.
The 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller does not have an embedded analog
I/O module.

Input Array

The input data array for the embedded analog I/O module contains 11 words as
described in Table 17. This array is read-only and the default value for all bits is 0.
Table 17 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Input Data Array
Bit
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 0
1 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 1
2 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 2
3 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 3
4 Nu Timestamp Value
5 Nu UI4 OI4 OC4 OC3 OC2 OC1 OC0 Nu SI4 SI3 SI2 SI1 SI0
6 LI3 HI3 UI3 OI3 LI2 HI2 UI2 OI2 LI1 HI1 UI1 OI1 LI0 HI0 UI0 OI0
7 S Cold Junction Compensation Value
8 S Output Data Loopback/Echo Channel 0
9 S Output Data Loopback/Echo Channel 1
10 Nu UO1 OO1 Nu UO0 OO0 Nu SO1 SO0

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 209

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 17 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Input Data Array
Bit
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where: Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel x is the data read from the field device that is connected to the channel.
Timestamp Value is the timestamp of when data was received at the corresponding channel.
Cold Junction Compensation value is the converted CJC data. The data is calculated in the following manner:
• If the CJC is open, the converted value is 25 °C (77 °F).
• If the CJC is not opened and the Update CJC sensor every other scan option is disabled, the converted value is 25 °C (77 °F).
• If the CJC is not opened and the Update CJC sensor every other scan option is enabled, the converted value is the measured temperature.
S Sign bit
Nu Bit not used
SIx General status bit for an input channel. Bits 0…3 are for input channels. Bit 4 is for CJC. If the bit is 0, the channel is operating normally. If the bit is 1, a fault has occurred
on the channel.

OIx Overrange alarm bit for an input channel.

0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Input signal is over normal range.
UIx Underrange alarm bit for an input channel.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = For bits 0…3, that is, input channels, the input signal is under the normal range. For bit 4, that is, channel using the thermocouple/mV, RTD/Resistance input type, the
input value equals the minimum value of the range.

HIx High alarm bit for an input channel 0.

0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Input signal is above the user-defined range
LIx Low alarm bit for an input channel 0.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Input signal is below the user-defined range.
OCx Open circuit detection bit.
0 = Channel is not experiencing an open circuit condition
1 = Channel is experiencing an open circuit condition
SOx General status bit for output channel 0 or 1.
0 = Channel operating normally
1 = A fault has occurred on the channel
OOx Overrange alarm bit for output channel 0 or 1.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Output signal is over the normal range
UOx Underrange alarm bit for output channel 0 or 1.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Output signal is below the normal range

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Output Array

The embedded analog I/O output image array of the module contains four words
as described in Table 18. This array is write only and the default value for all bits
is 0.
Table 18 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Output Data Array
Bit
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 S Analog Output Data Value Channel 0
1 S Analog Output Data Value Channel 1
2 Nu CL CH CL CH CL CH CL CH
I3 I3 I2 I2 I1 I1 I0 I0
3 Nu CL CH CL CH
O1 O1 O0 O0
Where: Analog Output Data Value Channel x is the data written to the channel.
S Sign bit
Nu Bit not used
CH Use this bit to cancel High Process Alarm Latch functionality for an input.
Ix 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch
CL Use this bit to cancel Low Process Alarm Latch functionality for an input.
Ix 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch
CH Use this bit to cancel High Process Alarm Latch functionality for an output.
Ox 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch
CL Use this bit to cancel Low Process Alarm Latch functionality for an output.
Ox 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 211

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Configuration Array

The embedded analog I/O configuration image array of the module contains 43
words as described in Table 19.
Table 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Real Time Sample Value
1 ETS Nu
2 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit Ch0 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI0
3 Wire & CLCD TU ChIo Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI0 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI0
4 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 0
5 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 0
6 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 0
7 Nu
8 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit ChI 1 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI1
9 Nu TU ChI1 Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI1 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI1
10 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 1
11 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 1
12 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 1
13 Nu
14 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit ChI 2 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI2
15 Wire & CLCD TU ChI1 Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI2 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI2
16 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 2
17 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 2
18 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 2
19 Nu
20 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit ChI 3 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI3
21 Nu TU ChI1 Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI3 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI3
22 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 3
23 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 3
24 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 3
25 Nu
26 CJC Ses Cycle Nu CJC WP Nu TU CJC
Calib
27 Nu
28 EC NU EHI ELI LC ER FM PM Nu PFE
29 Nu Outpt Fm ChI0 Nu Outpt Tp/RngeSel Ch0
30 S Fault Value Channel 0
31 S Program (Idle) Value Channel 0
32 S Clamp High Data Value Channel 0
33 S Clamp Low Data Value Channel 0

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Table 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
34 S Ramp Rate Channel 0
35 Nu
36 EC Nu EHI ELI LC ER FM PM Nu PFE
37 Nu Outpt Fm ChI1 Nu Outpt Tp/RngeSel ChI1
38 S Fault Value Channel 1
39 S Program (Idle) Value Channel 1
40 S Clamp High Data Value Channel 1
41 S Clamp Low Data Value Channel 1
42 S Ramp Rate Channel 1
Where: EC Use to enable or disable a channel. Each channel can be individually enabled.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Inpt Use this bit to select the form in which the analog data is returned to the controller and used in the control program.
Dta FM
CHIx
EA Use this bit to enable or disable the process alarms of a channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
AL Use this bit to enable or disable alarm latching on theprocess alarm of a channel.
0 = No latch
1 = Latch
EI Use this bit to enable or disable interrupts on the process alarms of a channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
EO Use this bit to enable or disable Open Circuit functionality on a channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Open Use to set the Open Circuit Response for a channel.
Circuit 0 = Upscale
Chx 1 = Downscale
2 = Last State
3 = Zero
OV CJC is performed by default by taking the CJC sensor temperature value for a given channel, converting that to a thermocouple voltage, and adding that
adjust voltage from the measured value before converting to a user value. If this bit is set for a given channel, the signal value is directly converted to a user value
(No cold junction compensation performed).
Wire & Use to set the wire mode. The combination of values in bits 14 and 15 determine the mode, as listed in the following table.
CLCD
Bit 15 Value Bit 14 Value Mode
0 0 3-wire and cycle lead compensation - Enable
0 1 3-wire and cycle lead compensation - Disable
1 0 2-wire (No lead compensation)
1 1 4-wire (No lead compensation)

TU Chx Use to set the temperature units.

0 = Degrees Celsius
1 = Degrees Fahrenheit

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 213

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where Inpt Use these bits to select the form the analog input data is presented to the controller and used by the controller. The combination of multiple selections in
(cont.) Dta Fm words and bits determines this value.
ChIx For more information on what selections determine the input data form that is used, see Table 21 on page 217.
Inpt Tp Use these bits to select the input type and operating range for a channel. For more information on what selections determine the input type and operating
/ Rnge range for a channel, see Table 22 on page 217.
Sel
ChIx
Filter Use these bits to select the filter setting for a channel. For more information on what selections determine the filter settings for a channel, see Table 20 on
Setting page 216.
Chx
Process Use to configure the Process Alarm High value for a channel. Configuration is done by using words 4, 10, 16, and 22 to set the Alarm High value.
Alarm
High
Data
Value
Channel
x

Process Use to configure the Process Alarm Low value for a channel. Configuration is done by using words 5, 11, 17, and 23 to set the Low High value.
Alarm
Low
Data
Value
Channel
x
Alarm Use to configure the Alarm Deadband value for a channel. Configuration is done by using words 6, 12, 18, and 24 to set the deadband alarm value.
Dead
Band
Data
Value
Channel
x
ETS Use to enable or disable the timestamping function on the module.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Real Use to set the Real Time Sample value. The available range = 0…5000 ms.
Time
Stamp
Value
Update Use this bit to enable or disable a CJC sensor.
CJCCo • If enabled, the CJC is read once every other module scan, and its value is updated in the CJC status word. This value is also used for thermocouple cold
mpens junction compensation.
ationE
n • If disabled, the CJC sensor value is not acquired, and the CJC temperature is fixed at 25 °C (77 °F) for all channels. The CJC is also fixed at 25 °C
(77 °F) for all channels if it is determined to be broken (short or open circuit).
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Cycle Use this bit to enable Cycle Calibration.
Calib • If enabled, the internal calibration of the module occurs once every 5 minutes.
• If disabled, the internal calibration of the module occurs only once at power on/ reset.
Cycle Calibration enables the module to readjust for environmental changes such as variations in temperature. However, the module throughput is slightly
reduced during the calibration operation.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Table 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where CJC WP Use this bit to enable or disable the CJC Weighted Profile.
(cont.) • If enabled, the CJC temperature for each channel is scaled by multiplying the single CJC reading by a predefined scale factor that is derived from lab
measurements of each terminal block pin's stable temperature. In this condition, all channel data is overridden with the CJC temperature of that
channel.
• If disabled, the single CJC reading is applied directly to all channels. If the CJC sensors are installed in a remote terminal block, the weighted profile must
be disabled. In this condition, channel data is presented in the input table as normal.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
PFE Use this bit to select whether data from the Program/Idle m ode or the Fault Enable mode is applied.
0 = Program/Idle mode data applied
1 = Fault mode data applied
ER Use this bit to enable or disable ramping for each channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
EHI Use this bit to enable or disable the output channel interrupt function when a High Clamp alarm is set.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
ELI Use this bit to enable or disable the output channel interrupt function when a Low Clamp alarm is set.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
PM Use this bit to set data a channel uses when it is in Program/Idle mode.
0 = Hold Last State value
1 = User-defined value
FM Use this bit to set data a channel uses when it is in Fault mode.
0 = Hold Last State value
1 = User-defined value
LC Use this bit to enable or disable latch functionality when Low/High clamp and Under/Over range alarm conditions exist on a channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Outpt Use these bits to select the form the analog output data is presented to the controller and used by the controller. The combination of multiple selections in
Dta Fm words and bits determines this value.
ChIx For more information on what selections determine the output data form that is used, see Table 23 on page 219.
Outpt Use these bits to select the output type and operating range for a channel. For more information on what selections determine the input type and operating
Tp / range for a channel, see Table 24 on page 219.
Rnge
Sel
ChIx
Fault Use this bit to configure the Fault mode value for a channel.
Value
Channel
x
Program Use this bit to configure the Program/Idle mode value for a channel.
(Idle)
Value
Channel
x

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 215

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Embedded Analog I/O Module Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where Clamp Use this bit to configure the Clamp High data value for a channel.
(cont.) High
Data
Value
Channel
x
Clamp Use this bit to configure the Clamp Low data value for a channel.
Low
Data
Value
Channel
x
Ramp Use this bit to set the Ramp Rate value for a channel.
Rate
Channel
x

Input Filter Selections

Table 20 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select a filter setting for a
channel. You use bits 0…3 in words 2, 8, 14, and 20 to make this selection.
Table 20 - Input Filter Selections
Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Filter Value Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit 01 Bit 00
60 Hz 0 0 0 0
50 Hz 0 0 0 1
10 Hz 0 0 1
250 Hz 0 0 1 1
500 Hz 0 1 0 0
1 kHz 0 1 0 1
Spare(1) Values 6…15
(1) An attempt to write a non-valid (any Spare value) or Not Used bit configuration into the Input Filter Response Select field causes a
Module Configuration Error (contained in the Mod_Condition Array).

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Analog Input Data Format

Table 21 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the output data
format for analog data that is sent to the controller for a channel. You use bits 8…10
in words 3, 9, 15, and 21 to make this selection.

Table 21 - Analog Input Data Format

Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Analog Output Data Format Bit 10 Bit 09 Bit 08
Raw/Proportional Data 0 0 0
Engineering Units 0 0 1
Engineering Units x 10 0 1 0
Scaled for PID 0 1 1
Percent Range 1 0 0
Spare(1) Values 5…7
(1) An attempt to write a non-valid (any Spare value) bit configuration into the Input/Output Data Format Select field causes a Module
Configuration Error (contained in Mod_Condition Array). All bits shown as 0 in Table 21 are set to 0.

Analog Input Type and Operating Range

Table 22 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the input type and
operating range for a channel. You use bits 0…5 in words 3, 9, 15, 21, 29, and 37 to
make the selections.

Table 22 - Analog Input Type and Operating Range

Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Input Type and Normal
Operating Range Bit 05 Bit 04 Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit Bit 00
-10…10V DC 0 0 0 0 0 0
0…5V DC 0 0 0 0 0 1
0…10V DC 0 0 0 0 1 0
4…20 mA 0 0 0 0 1 1
1…5V DC 0 0 0 1 0 0
0…20 mA 0 0 0 1 0 1
-50 mV…50 mv 0 0 0 1 1 0
-100…100 mV 0 0 0 1 1 1
Thermocouple J 0 0 1 0 0 0
Thermocouple K 0 0 1 0 0 1
Thermocouple T 0 0 1 0 1 0
Thermocouple E 0 0 1 0 1 1
Thermocouple R 0 0 1 1 0 0
Thermocouple S 0 0 1 1 0 1
Thermocouple B 0 0 1 1 1 0
Thermocouple N 0 0 1 1 1 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 217

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 22 - Analog Input Type and Operating Range

Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Input Type and Normal
Operating Range Bit 05 Bit 04 Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit Bit 00
Thermocouple C 0 1 0 0 0 0
100 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 0 0 1
200 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 0 1 0
500 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 0 1 1
1000 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 1 0 0
100 Ω PT 3916 0 1 0 1 0 1
200 Ω PT 3916 0 1 0 1 1 0
500 Ω PT 3916 0 1 0 1 1 1
1000 Ω PT 3916 0 1 1 0 0 0
10 Ω CU 426 0 1 1 0 0 1
120 Ω Ni 618 0 1 1 0 1 0
120 Ω Ni 672 0 1 1 0 1 1
604 Ω NiFe 518 0 1 1 1 0 0
150 Ω 0 1 1 1 0 1
500 Ω 0 1 1 1 1 0
1000 Ω 0 1 1 1 1 1
3000 Ω 1 0 0 0 0 0

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Analog Output Data Format

Table 23 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the output data
format for analog data that is sent to the controller for a channel. You use bits 8…10
in words 29 and 37 to make this selection.

Table 23 - Analog Output Data Format

Bit Settings
(Words 29 and 37)
Analog Output Data Format Bit 10 Bit 09 Bit 08
Raw/Proportional Data 0 0 0
Engineering Units 0 0 1
Scaled for PID 0 1 0
Percent Range 0 1 1
Spare(1) Values 4…7
(1) An attempt to write a non-valid (any Spare value) bit configuration into the Input/Output Data Format Select field causes a Module
Configuration Error (contained in Mod_Condition Array). All bits shown as 0 in Table 23 are set to 0

Analog Output Type and Operating Range

Table 24 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the input type and
operating range for a channel. You use bits 0…5 in words 29 and 37 to make the
selections.

Table 24 - Analog Output Type and Operating Range

Bit Settings
(Words 29 and 37)
Output Type and Normal
Operating Range Bit 05 Bit 04 Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit Bit 00
-10…10V DC 0 0 0 0 0 0
0…5V DC 0 0 0 0 0 1
0…10V DC 0 0 0 0 1 0
4…20 mA 0 0 0 0 1 1
1…5V DC 0 0 0 1 0 0
0…20 mA 0 0 0 1 0 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 219

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Local Expansion Modules - Optional

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems support the use of Compact I/O

modules as local expansion modules along a CompactBus backplane:

• The controllers support up to four Compact I/O modules as local

expansion modules.

• When possible, use specialty Compact I/O modules to meet unique

application requirements.

• Consider using a 1492 wiring system for each I/O module as an alternative
to the terminal block that comes with the module.

• Use 1492 PanelConnect™ modules and cables if you are connecting input
modules to sensors.

• Install local expansion modules in the same local bank as the

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

Install Local Expansion Modules

Complete these steps to install local expansion modules in your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

1. Attach the Compact I/O modules as described in these publications:

• Compact I/O Modules Installation Instructions, publication
1769-IN088
• Compact I/O DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions,
publication 1769-IN060
2. Use the tongue-and-groove slots to attach a 1769-ECR Compact I/O end
cap terminator to the last module in the system.
3. Move the lever of the end cap bus terminator fully to the left until it clicks
to lock the end cap bus terminator.

Wire Local Expansion Modules

Wire each Compact I/O module that is used as a local expansion module
according to the technical documentation for that module.

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

Consider the following when using distributed I/O modules over an

EtherNet/IP network:

• Each remote EtherNet/IP adapter included in the system must be counted

toward the maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes of the controller.

For more information on maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes, see

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 130.

• The configurable RPI settings vary depending on which distributed I/O

modules are used in the system.

• For information to add distributed I/O modules to your CompactLogix

5370 L2 control system, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a
DeviceNet Network on page 236.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system on an

EtherNet/IP network that uses all three I/O module options.
Embedded I/O Modules Local Expansion Modules

Distributed I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 221

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

You must use the following to use distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet
network in your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system:

• Logix Designer application or the Studio 5000 environment - For more

information, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 232.

• RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software - For more information, see

Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network on
page 236.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system on a

DeviceNet network that uses all three I/O module options.

Embedded I/O Modules Local Expansion Modules

Distributed I/O Modules

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Validate I/O Layout You must validate the layout of I/O modules in your CompactLogix 5370 L2
control system. Consider these points when validating I/O layout placement:
• Estimate Requested Packet Interval
• Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates
• System Power Availability
• Power Supply Distance Rating

Estimate Requested Packet Interval

The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the
controller sends data to and receives data from I/O modules. You set an RPI rate
for each I/O module in your system, including embedded I/O modules, local
expansion modules, or distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

The CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers attempt to scan an I/O module at the

configured RPI rate. The controller scans distributed I/O modules at the
configured RPI rates.

With embedded I/O modules and local expansion modules, however, some
system configuration parameters determine the actual rate at which the controller
scans the modules. That is, the controller can be configured to scan an I/O
module at one rate but actually scan the module at another rate.

For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap minor fault occurs if there is
at least one I/O module that cannot be serviced within its RPI time.

The configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on actual RPI
rates. These configuration factors can affect the effective scan frequency for any
individual embedded or local expansion module:
• Rates at which RPI values are set for embedded I/O modules
• Number of embedded I/O modules that are used in the system
• Types of embedded I/O modules that are used in the system
• Rates at which RPI values are set for Compact I/O modules
• Number of Compact I/O modules in the system
• Types of Compact I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 223

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 25 describes RPI rate guidelines.

Table 25 - Requested Packet Interval Guidelines
Type of Module Guidelines(1)
All digital The following guidelines apply:
• 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…30 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
Mix of digital and The following guidelines apply:
analog or all analog • 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…13 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
• 14…30 modules can be scanned in 3 ms.
Specialty The following conditions apply:
• For every 1769-SDN module in the system, increase every RPI by 2 ms for every other
module.
• For every 1769-HSC module in the system, increase every RPI by 1 ms for every other
module.
• For every 1769-ASCII module in the system, increase every RPI by 1 ms for every other
module.
• For every 1769-SM2 module in the system, increase every RPI by 2 ms for every other
module.
(1) The guidelines in Table 25 do not factor in the following items, which affect CMX5370 controller CPU loading:
• Periodic/Event User tasks priority <=; IO task priority = User task priority
• IOT (Immediate Output Instruction)
• Messaging
• CompactBus browsing such as accessing DeviceNet network through 1769-SDN using CMX5370 Ethernet or USB connection
Module RPI guidelines can require adjustment (increase of 1 ms or more) if CMX5370 controller application includes one or more of
the listings in Table 25. Monitor controller minor faults to determine if Module RPI overlaps have occurred.

IMPORTANT When considering the number of I/O modules, remember that they can be the embedded I/O
modules on the controller or Compact I/O modules that are used as local expansion modules.
Therefore, the consideration for using modules can be any of the following system
configurations:
• Only embedded I/O modules
• Only Compact I/O modules
• Some combination of embedded I/O modules and Compact I/O modules

You can set RPI rates higher for individual Compact I/O modules than the rates
listed in Table 25. The RPI shows how quickly modules can be scanned, not how
quickly an application can use the data. The RPI is asynchronous to the program
scan. Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O throughput.

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates

When following the guidelines described in Table 25, most CompactLogix 5370
L2 control systems operate as expected. Some systems that follow the guidelines
can experience a Module RPI Overlap minor fault that is described in the
following table.

Name Fault Condition in Which Fault Occurs

Information
Module (Type 03) I/O fault This fault is logged when the current RPI update of an I/O module overlaps with its
RPI (Code 94) Module previous RPI update. The Minor Faults tab in the Controller Properties dialog box
Overlap RPI overlap indicates in which module the RPI overlap occurs.
detected If multiple I/O modules experience the fault, the application indicates that the fault
Module Slot = x, occurred on the first such I/O module. Typically, it is an I/O module with a large
where x is the slot Input/Output array sizes. Example modules that use large Input/Output array sizes
number of the I/O include the 1769-SDN and 1769-HSC modules. In these cases, we recommend that
module in the I/O you adjust the RPI of the module to eliminate the fault.
Configuration Once the fault is cleared from the first I/O module, the application indicates the
section next module that experiences the fault. This pattern continues until the fault is
cleared from all affected I/O modules.
To avoid this fault, set the RPI rate of the I/O modules to higher numerical values.
We recommend you use an RPI value that is not a common multiple of other
module RPI values, such as 2.5 ms, 5.5 ms, or 7 ms:
• We recommend that you do not run CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems with
Module RPI Overlap faults.
• A system that experiences many Module RPI Overlap faults cannot operate
optimally because I/O data is not sampled at the expected rate that RPI settings
determine.
• When the project is downloaded or the RPI value of a module is adjusted, it is
expected to have a minor fault. Faults under these conditions are transitionary.
Clear the fault and wait for the fault to reappear before adjusting the RPI value
or the task priorities.

System Power Availability

An embedded 24V DC Input, nonisolated power supply powers all components

in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

The embedded power supply provides the following power to the CompactBus:
• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller:
– 1.54 A @ 5V DC
– 0.95 mA @ 24V DC

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers:

– 1 A @ 5V DC
– 0.8 mA @ 24V DC

The embedded power supply can power any combination of controller,

embedded I/O modules, and local expansion modules that are used in your
application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 225

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Power Supply Distance Rating

In a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, you can install Compact I/O

modules on as local expansion modules to the right of the controller system.
Compact I/O modules each have a power supply distance rating that you must
consider before you install them.

Power supply distance rating is the number of slots a Compact I/O module can
be installed away from the power supply. If a Compact I/O module has a distance
rating of three, you can include up to two modules between the Compact I/O
module and the power supply.

Additionally, the controller has embedded I/O modules that are designed to
protect against installation of a Compact I/O module directly to the right of the
embedded power supply. CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems have
embedded I/O modules in the controller. CompactLogix 5370 L2 control
systems have one or two embedded
I/O modules as described as follows:

• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller - One embedded I/O module

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers - Two

embedded I/O modules

The embedded I/O modules are not considered local expansion modules.
However, you must still include each embedded I/O module in the module slot
count when determining where to install Compact I/O module as a local
expansion module.

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Because CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems only allow up to four local

expansion modules in the system, you can install most Compact I/O modules in
any local expansion module slot. Some Compact I/O modules have power supply
distance ratings that affect where you can install them in the CompactLogix 5370
L2 control system.

For example, the 1769-ASCII Compact ASCII and 1769-HSC Compact

high-speed counter modules each have a power supply distance rating of four.
The farthest local expansion module slot where you can install one of these
modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system is module slot number two
or three as determined by the controller catalog number that is used in the
control system.

Table 26 describes the farthest local expansion module slot where you can install
a 1769-HSC high-speed counter module and meet its power supply distance
rating requirement.
Table 26 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QB1B 1 The embedded I/O module is the first module in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating, the
1769-HSC high-speed counter module can be installed in slot 3 of the local expansion modules, as shown in the following
graphic.

1769-HSC Module

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install up to two local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 227

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 26 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B 2 The embedded I/O modules are the first two modules in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module can be installed in slot 2 of the local expansion modules, as shown in the
following graphic.

1769-HSC High-speed
Module

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install one local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter.

IMPORTANT When counting I/O modules to determine the 1769-HSC high-speed counter
module placement in a 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B or 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control
system, the embedded I/O module appearance is different between the
physical appearance and the appearance of the module in the application.

The physical appearance is a shown in the previous graphic. The second

module is two rows of termination points below one set of status indicators.

In the application, the second embedded I/O module appears as two modules
in the Controller Organizer each with their own slot number, that is [2] and [3].

When the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module is installed in the farthest

local expansion module slot possible, that is the fourth module in the system,
it appears with a [5] designation in the Controller Organizer, as shown in the
following graphic.

Modules [2] and [3] are

shown separately but are
considered one module
when counting modules
to meet power supply
distance rating
requirements.

1769-HSC high-speed counter module is shown as module [5] in this location but considered the
fourth module when counting modules to meet power supply distance rating requirements.

For more information about the power supply distance rating for a Compact I/O
module, see CompactLogix Selection Guide, publication 1769-SG001.

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Configure Local I/O Modules You can configure one of these types of local I/O modules in
the Studio 5000 environment:
• Configure Embedded I/O Modules
• Configure Local Expansion Modules

Configure Embedded I/O Modules

Embedded I/O modules are automatically created in the I/O Configuration
portion of the Controller Organizer. Complete these steps to configure an
embedded I/O module in your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

1. Right-click the embedded I/O module and choose Properties.

2. Click the required tab, make the necessary changes, and click OK.

IMPORTANT You can also use the tags to configure the embedded I/O modules of the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller. When attempting to use the tags to make
analog I/O module selections in the input, output and configuration data
arrays, the options are complicated.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 229

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Configure Local Expansion Modules

Complete these steps to add a Compact I/O module to your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system and configure it.

1. Right-click the 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

3. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

Common Configuration Parameters

While the configuration options vary from module to module, there are some
common options you typically configure when using Compact I/O modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, as described in Table 27.
Table 27 - Common Configuration Parameters
Configuration Option Description
Requested packet interval (RPI) The RPI specifies the interval at which data is transmitted or received over a connection. For 1769 Compact Local I/O modules, data is
transmitted to the controller at the RPI.
When scanned on the local bus or over an EtherNet/IP network, input modules are scanned at the RPI specified in the module
configuration. Typically, you configure an RPI in milliseconds (ms). For I/O modules, the range is 0.5…750 ms.
When scanned over a DeviceNet network via a 1769-SDN scanner in the CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, distributed input
modules are scanned at the rate the DeviceNet adapter that connects the input modules to the network supports. For example, if your
system includes a remote system of 1734 POINT I/O modules on a DeviceNet network, the 1769-SDN scanner can only scan the
distributed 1734 POINT I/O modules as quickly as the 1734-ADN DeviceNet adapter can transmit the data.
Module definition Set of configuration parameters that affect data transmission between the controller and the I/O module. The parameters include the
following:
• Series - Hardware series of the module.
• Revision - Major and minor firmware revision levels that are used on the module.
• Electronic Keying - See LOGIX-AT001 for Electronic Keying information.
• Connection - Type of connection between the controller writing the configuration and the I/O module, such as Output.
• Data format - Type of data that is transferred between the controller and I/O module and what tags are generated when the
configuration is complete.
Module Fault on Controller If Connection This option determines how the controller is affected if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode. You can configure the project
Fails While in Run Mode so that a connection failure causes a major fault on the controller or not.
The default setting is for the option to be enabled, that is, if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode, a major fault occurs on
the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 231

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

I/O Connections

IMPORTANT You can only use direct connections with the local expansion modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

A Logix5000 system uses connections to transmit I/O data, as described in

Table 28.
Table 28 - I/O Module Connections
Connection Description
Direct A direct connection is a real-time, data-transfer link between the controller and an I/O module. The controller maintains and monitors
the connection. Any break in the connection, such as a module fault, causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area that is
associated with the module.
Typically, analog I/O modules, diagnostic I/O modules, and specialty modules require direct connections.
Rack-optimized For digital I/O modules, you can select rack-optimized communication.
This option is used with distributed I/O modules and the Rack Optimization connection selection is made when configuring the remote
adapter. For example, if your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system includes distributed digital I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP and you
want to use a rack-optimized connection with those digital I/O modules, you must configure the EtherNet/IP adapter of the distributed
digital I/O modules to use a connection type of Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection consolidates connection usage between the controller and the digital I/O modules in a remote chassis or on
one DIN rail. Rather than having individual, direct connections for each I/O module, there is one connection for the entire rack (or DIN
rail).

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
an EtherNet/IP network.
Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network
IMPORTANT When adding distributed I/O modules, remember to count the remote Ethernet
adapter to remain within the maximum number of EtherNet/IP network nodes
limitation for your controller.
The distributed I/O modules that are connected to the controller via the remote
Ethernet adapter are not counted toward the maximum Ethernet node limit for
the controller.
For example, a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller supports up to 16 Ethernet
nodes. You can add up to 16 remote Ethernet adapters to the I/O Configuration
section because each remote adapter counts against the node count. However,
you can add as many remote I/O modules to the chassis of the adapter as
necessary. Remote I/O modules do not count against the node count.
For more information on node limitations, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 130.

Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on an

EtherNet/IP network.

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

1. Right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new Ethernet adapter as necessary and click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 233

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

4. Right-click the new adapter and choose New Module.

5. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

6. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

7. Repeat these steps to add all desired distributed I/O modules.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control

system that uses distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O 1734-AENTR POINT I/O

PanelView Plus

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B • Kinetix 350 • Kinetix 350

• 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap • 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 235

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
a DeviceNet network.
Modules on a DeviceNet
Network Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on a
DeviceNet network.

1. If you have not done so, install a 1769-SDN Compact I/O DeviceNet
scanner into the local bank of your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control
system.
2. Right-click 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

3. Select the 1769-SDN scanner and click Create.

4. Choose a Major Revision and click OK.

The New Module dialog box appears.

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

5. Configure the new 1769-SDN scanner as necessary and click OK.

6. Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to define the scan list in the
1769-SDN scanner to communicate data between the devices and the
controller through the scanner.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control

system that uses distributed I/O modules on a DeviceNet network.

• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
• 1769-SDN

1734-ADN POINT I/O 1606-XLDNET 1794-ADN FLEX I/O

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 237

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Monitor I/O Modules With CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, you can use the following options to
monitor I/O modules:

• Quick View Pane below the Controller Organizer

• Connection tab in the Module Properties dialog box

• Programming logic to monitor fault data so you can act.

When a fault occurs on an I/O module, a yellow triangle on the module listing in
the Controller Organizer alerts you to the fault, as shown in the following
graphic.

The following graphic shows the Quick View Pane, which indicates the type of
fault.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

To see the fault description on the Connection tab in Module Properties dialog
box, complete these steps.

1. In the I/O Configuration, right-click the faulted I/O module and

choose Properties.

2. Click the Connection tab and use the fault description, in the Module
Fault section, to diagnose the issue.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and remedy the issue.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 239

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

End Cap Detection and Module Faults

End cap detection is performed through the last module on a 1769 Bus. If that
module experiences a fault such that it cannot communicate on the 1769 Bus, the
following events occur:

• End cap detection fails

• Controller faults

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 9

Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370

L3 Controllers

This chapter explains how to use Compact I/O modules in a CompactLogix

5370 L3 control system.

Topic Page
Select I/O Modules 241
Validate I/O Layout 246
Configure I/O 257
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 259
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network 262
Monitor I/O Modules 264

Select I/O Modules CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems offer these I/O module options:
• Local Expansion Modules
• Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network
• Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 241

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Local Expansion Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems support the use of Compact I/O

modules as local expansion modules along a CompactBus backplane.

Consider the following when using local expansion modules:

• The controllers support this many local Compact I/O modules across up
to three I/O banks, that is, the local bank and two more banks.

Cat. No. Local Expansion Modules

Supported, max
1769- L30ER 8
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 16
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 30

• When possible, use specialty Compact I/O modules to meet unique

application requirements.

• Consider using a 1492 wiring system for each I/O module as an alternative
to the terminal block that comes with the module.
• Use 1492 PanelConnect™ modules and cables if you are connecting input
modules to sensors.

Install Local Expansion Modules

Complete these steps to install local expansion modules in your

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system:

1. Attach the 1769 Compact communication or I/O modules as described in

these publications:
• Compact I/O Modules Installation Instructions, publication
1769-IN088
• Compact I/O DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions,
publication 1769-IN060
2. If your system uses only a local bank, complete these steps.
a. Use the tongue-and-groove slots to attach a 1769-ECR Compact I/O
end cap terminator to the last module in the system.
b. Move the lever of the end cap bus terminator fully to the left until it
clicks to lock the end cap bus terminator.

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

3. If your system uses more banks, follow these steps.

a. Install a 1769-CRx Compact I/O communication bus expansion cable
at the right end of the local bank.
b. Connect the 1769-CRx cable to the additional bank as necessary.

That is, how you connect to the first extra bank—on the right or left
side of the bank, determines the expansion cable that is installed at the
end of the local bank. See Figure 37 on page 243 for examples of how to
connect a local bank to extra banks.
c. Complete the installation of the remaining banks in your system.

IMPORTANT Make sure that you install an end cap at the end of the last bank in
your system.

The following example shows example systems with local expansion

modules included.

Figure 37 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

Horizontal Orientation

Bank 1 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 2 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 3

Bank 1

1769-CRRx Cable
Vertical Orientation

Bank 2

Wire Local Expansion Modules

Wire each Compact I/O module that is used as a local expansion module
according to the technical documentation for that module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 243

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in your
CompactLogix 5370 control system. Consider the following when using
distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network:

• Each remote EtherNet/IP adapter included in the system must be counted

toward the maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes for the controller.

For more information on maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes, see

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 130.

• The configurable RPI settings vary depending on which distributed I/O

modules are used in the system.

• For information to add distributed I/O modules to your CompactLogix

5370 control system, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a
DeviceNet Network on page 262.

The following graphic shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system that uses
local expansion modules and distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP
network.
Local Expansion Modules Distributed I/O Modules

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system. Consider the following when using
distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet network:

You must use the following to use distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet
network in your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system:

• Logix Designer application or the Studio 5000 environment - For more

information, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 259.

• RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software - For more information, see

DeviceNet Network Communication on page 144.

The following graphic shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system that uses
local expansion modules and distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet
network.
Local Expansion Modules Distributed I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 245

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Validate I/O Layout After you have selected your I/O modules, you must validate the system that you
want to design. Consider these points when validating I/O layout placement:
• Estimate Requested Packet Interval
• Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates
• Calculate System Power Consumption
• Power Supply Distance Rating
• Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Estimate Requested Packet Interval

The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the
controller sends data to and receives data from I/O modules. You set an RPI rate
for each I/O module in your system.

The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers attempt to scan an I/O module at the

configured RPI rate. For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap minor
fault occurs if there is at least one I/O module which cannot be serviced within
its RPI time.

The configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on actual RPI
rates. These configuration factors can affect the effective scan frequency for any
individual module:
• Rates at which RPI rates are set for other Compact I/O modules
• Number of other Compact I/O modules in the system
• Types of other Compact I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Table 29 describes RPI rate guidelines.

Table 29 - Requested Packet Interval Guidelines
Type of Module Guidelines(1)
All digital The following guidelines apply:
• 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…30 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
Mix of digital and The following guidelines apply:
analog or all analog • 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…13 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
• 14…30 modules can be scanned in 3 ms.
Specialty The following conditions apply:
• For every 1769-SDN module in the system, increase the RPI of every other module by 2
ms.
• For every 1769-HSC module in the system, increase the RPI of every other module by 1
ms.
• For every 1769-ASCII module in the system, increase the RPI of every other module by 1
ms.
• For every 1769-SM2 module in the system, increase the RPI of every other module by 2
ms.
(1) The guidelines in Table 29 do not factor in the following items, which affect CMX5370 controller CPU loading:
• Periodic/Event User tasks priority <=; IO task priority = User task priority
• IOT (Immediate Output Instruction)
• Messaging
• CompactBus browsing such as accessing DeviceNet network through 1769-SDN using CMX5370 Ethernet or USB connection
Module RPI guidelines can require adjustment (increase of 1 ms or more) if CMX5370 controller application includes one or more of
the listings in Table 29. Monitor controller minor faults to determine if Module RPI overlaps have occurred.

You can set the RPI rates of individual Compact I/O modules higher than the
rates listed in Table 29. The RPI shows how quickly modules can be scanned, not
how quickly an application can use the data. The RPI is asynchronous to the
program scan. Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O
throughput.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 247

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates

When following the guidelines described in Table 29, most CompactLogix 5370
L3 control systems operate as expected. Some systems that follow the guidelines
can experience a Module RPI Overlap minor fault as described in the
following table.

Name Fault Condition In Which Fault Occurs

Information
Module (Type 03) I/O fault This fault is logged when the current RPI update of an I/O module overlaps with its
RPI (Code 94) Module previous RPI update. The Minor Faults tab in the Controller Properties dialog box
Overlap RPI overlap indicates in which module the RPI overlap occurs.
detected If multiple I/O modules experience the fault, the application indicates that the fault
Module Slot = x, occurred on the first such I/O module. Typically, it is an I/O module with a large
where x is the slot Input/Output array sizes. Example modules that use large Input/Output array sizes
number of the I/O include the 1769-SDN and 1769-HSC modules. In these cases, we recommend that
module in the I/O you adjust the RPI of the module to eliminate the fault.
Configuration Once the fault is cleared from the first I/O module, the application indicates the
section next module that experiences the fault. This pattern continues until the fault is
cleared from all affected I/O modules.
To avoid this fault, set the RPI rate of the I/O modules to higher numerical values.
We recommend you use an RPI value that is not a common multiple of other
module RPI values, such as 2.5 ms, 5.5 ms, or 7 ms.
• We recommend that you do not run CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems with
Module RPI Overlap faults.
• A system that experiences many Module RPI Overlap faults cannot operate
optimally because I/O data is not sampled at the expected rate that the RPI
settings determine.
• When the project is downloaded or the RPI value of an I/O module is adjusted, it
is expected to have a minor fault. Faults under these conditions are
transitionary. Clear the fault and wait for the fault to reappear before adjusting
the RPI value or the task priorities.

248 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Calculate System Power Consumption

The 1769 Compact I/O power supplies provide power to CompactLogix local
and more banks. The provided power is measured in current capacity.

Consider these points when designing your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control

system banks:

• 1769 Compact I/O power supplies have two maximum current capacity
requirements that affect how you design and configure one bank.

The following are the maximum current capacity requirements:

– Maximum current capacity for one bank
– Maximum current capacity for each side of the power supply

Current Capacity for Single Bank

Current Capacity for Side of Bank Current Capacity for Side of Bank

• The maximum current capacity requirements vary by the power supply

that is used in the bank.

Power Supply Current Capacity, max for Single Bank Current Capacity, max for Each Side of
Cat. No. Bank(1)
1769-PA2
2 A at 5V DC and 0.8 A at 24V DC 1 A at 5V DC and 0.4 A at 24V DC
1769-PB2
1769-PA4
4 A at 5V DC and 2 A at 24V DC 2 A at 5V DC and 1 A at 24V DC
1769-PB4
(1) Specification for banks with devices on left and right sides of the power supply.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 249

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Calculate Power Consumption in Single Bank

IMPORTANT One bank requires the CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers to reside in the
leftmost slot. At minimum, you must calculate the power consumption of the
controller on the left side of the power supply.
If more modules are installed on the left side of the power supply, you must
calculate the power consumption for those modules as well.
If more modules are installed to the right of the power supply, you must
calculate the power consumption for that side separately.

Use this table to calculate power consumption in one bank.

Table 30 - Module Power Consumption Calculation for a Local Bank

Side of Power Device Cat. No. Number of Module Current Requirements Calculated Current =
Supply Modules(3) (Number of Modules) x (Module
Current Requirements)
at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA) at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA)
1769-L30ER 1 500 225 500 225
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
Left - Required
1769-L33ER
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM
Left - Optional I/O Module-specific Up to 3 Module-specific Module-specific
Total Current Required(2):

Right I/O Module-specific Up to 8 Module-specific Module-specific

IMPORTANT: Insert a separate row in this
calculation for each I/O module.
Total Current Required(2):

Total Current Required for Single Bank if Modules Are Installed on Both Sides of the Power Supply(1):
(1) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for the bank.
(2) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for this side of the bank.
(3) In the local bank, you can only install up to three modules to the left of the power supply because the CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers have a power supply distance rating of four and must be within
four slots of the Compact I/O power supply. On the right side of the power supply in the local bank and both sides of the power supply in more banks, you can install up to eight modules if power supply
distance ratings for the modules validate the system design.

250 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Calculate Power Consumption in an Additional Bank

IMPORTANT In extra banks, you can install I/O modules to the left side, right side, or both
sides of the power supply.
The system design determines how to use the following table.

Use this table to calculate power consumption in an extra bank.

Table 31 - Module Power Consumption Calculation for an Additional Bank

Side of Power Device Cat. No. Number of Module Current Requirements Calculated Current =
Supply Modules(3) (Number of Modules) x (Module
Current Requirements)
at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA) at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA)
Left - Optional in I/O Modules Up to 8 Module-specific Module-specific
an extra bank IMPORTANT: Insert a separate row in this
calculation for each I/O module.
Total Current Required(2):

Right - Optional in I/O Modules Up to 8 Module-specific Module-specific

one bank IMPORTANT: Insert a separate row for each I/O
module.
Total Current Required(2):

Total Current Required for Bank if Modules Are Installed on Both Sides of the Power Supply(1):
(1) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for the bank.
(2) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for this side of the bank.
(3) You can install up to eight modules in additional banks if the power supply distance ratings for the modules validate the system design.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 251

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Depending on the controller catalog number, CompactLogix 5370 L3

controllers support between 8 and 30 I/O modules. For more information on
catalog numbers, see Local Expansion Modules on page 242.

Consider these factors when determining the physical placement of the

I/O modules:

• You can install I/O modules in local and extra banks.

• You can install I/O modules to the left and right of the power supply.

• When a system requires multiple banks, you can install the additional
banks horizontally or vertically, as shown in this graphic.

Horizontal Orientation

Local Bank Extra Bank Extra Bank

1769-CRL1 Compact I/O Communication

Bus Expansion Cables

Local Bank

1769-CRR1 Compact I/O Communication

Vertical Orientation
Bus Expansion Cables

Extra Bank

• Each I/O module also has a power supply distance rating and maximum
current draw. Considered jointly, distance ratings and current draw
determine where I/O modules can be placed in a bank and what
configuration of modules can be installed in the bank.

For more information on power supply distance ratings, see Power Supply
Distance Rating on page 73. For more information on system power
consumption, see Calculate System Power Consumption on page 249.

252 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Local Bank

To validate the local bank design, confirm that the design meets these
requirements:

• The controller is the leftmost device in the local bank.

• No more than three modules are installed between the controller and the
left side of the power supply.

• No more than eight modules are installed to the right of the power supply.

• The power consumption of the modules on each side of the power supply
does not exceed the capacity of the power supply for that side.

• The total power consumption by all modules in the bank does not exceed
the capacity of the power supply for the entire bank.

• Modules are installed such that all power supply distance rating and system
power consumption requirements are met.

For example, the 1769-SDN scanner has a power supply distance rating of
four. If the design includes the installation of a 1769-SDN scanner with
greater than three modules between it and the power supply, the design is
invalid.

IMPORTANT Regarding power supply distance ratings, if you install a module that violates
its power supply distance rating specification, the system can appear to
operate normally for a time, but could experience operational issues over time,
such as I/O faults.

The following example graphic shows a local bank.

1769 Compact I/O
Power Supply

1769-L33ER Controller End Cap

Compact I/O Modules Compact I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 253

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Additional Banks

If your application calls for twelve or more I/O modules, at minimum, you must
install the modules in extra banks. The conditions of each application determine
the number of extra banks.

Once the local bank design is validated, you must validate the design for any
additional banks. To validate extra bank designs, confirm that the design meets
these requirements:

• Compact I/O communication bus expansion cables are used properly.

TIP Compact I/O expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end
caps regardless of whether they are installed at the right or left side of
the communication bus.

• No more than eight modules are installed on either side of the power
supply.

• The power consumption of the modules on each side of the power supply
does not exceed the capacity of the power supply for that side.

• Modules are installed such that all power supply distance rating
requirements are met.

• End caps are installed properly, as shown in the following graphic.

Local Bank

1769-CRRx Cables

Extra Bank

End Cap

254 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems do not have embedded I/O modules.

You begin counting local expansion slots with the first Compact I/O module
installed next to the power supply when determining where to install a
Compact I/O module and meet its power supply distance rating.

In CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, you can install Compact I/O

modules to the left or right side of the power supply. You can also use local and
extra banks in CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, with each allowing the
inclusion of Compact I/O modules.

Local Bank

In the local bank, the controller must be the leftmost device in the system and
you can only install up to three modules between the controller and the power
supply. Therefore, any Compact I/O modules that are installed to the left of the
power supply in the local bank, are in a module slot that meets the module’s
power supply distance rating requirements.

Additional Banks

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems also support the use of extra banks for
the local expansion modules of the system. Every additional bank requires a 1769
Compact I/O power supply. The bank can be designed with local expansion
modules on either side of the power supply.

Most Compact I/O modules have power supply distance rating values that allow
you to install them in any slot on either side of the power supply in extra banks.
Some Compact I/O modules have power supply distance ratings that affect
where you can install them in the CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system.

For example, the 1769-ASCII Compact ASCII and 1769-HSC Compact

high-speed counter modules each have a power supply distance rating of four.
These modules can be installed in local expansion module slots one
through three.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 255

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

In this case, you must install the 1769-ASCII module and 1769-HSC high-speed
counter module with no more three Compact I/O modules between the module
and the power, regardless of whether the modules are installed to the left or right
of the power supply.

This graphic shows 1769-HSC high-speed counter modules that are installed in
a 1769-L36ERM control system that meet the power supply distance rating of
the module.

1769-HSC Module 1769-HSC Module

Local Bank

1769-HSC High-speed Counter Modules Installed in a 1769-L36ERM Control System

Meeting the Power Supply Distance Rating Requirements of the High-speed Counter
Module

Extra Bank

1769-HSC Module 1769-HSC Module

IMPORTANT The previous table shows example systems with 1769-HSC high-speed counter
modules in each control system because it has a power supply distance rating
of four and cannot be installed as far from the Compact I/O power supply. Most
Compact I/O modules have power supply distance ratings that allow you to
install them anywhere in the local expansion slots of a CompactLogix 5370 L2
control system.
For more information about the power supply distance rating for a Compact I/O
module, see CompactLogix Selection Guide, publication 1769-SG001.

256 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Configure I/O Complete these steps to add a Compact I/O module to your
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system and configure it.

1. Right-click the 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 257

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Common Configuration Parameters

While the configuration options vary from module to module, there are some
common options you typically configure when using Compact I/O modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system, as described in Table 32.
Table 32 - Common Configuration Parameters
Configuration Option Description
Requested packet interval (RPI) The RPI specifies the interval at which data is transmitted or received over a connection. For 1769 Compact Local I/O modules, data is
transmitted to the controller at the RPI.
When scanned on the local bus or over an EtherNet/IP network, input modules are scanned at the RPI specified in the module
configuration. Typically, you configure an RPI in milliseconds (ms). For I/O modules, the range is 0.5…750 ms.
When scanned over a DeviceNet network, distributed input modules are scanned at the rate that the DeviceNet adapter that connects
the input modules to the network supports. For example, the scan rate for distributed 1734 POINT I/O over DeviceNet can only occur as
quickly as the 1734-ADN DeviceNet adapter can transmit the data.
Module definition Set of configuration parameters that affect data transmission between the controller and the I/O module. The parameters include the
following:
• Series - Hardware series of the module.
• Revision - Major and minor firmware revision levels that are used on the module.
• Electronic Keying - See LOGIX-AT001 for Electronic Keying information.
• Connection - Type of connection between the controller writing the configuration and the I/O module, such as Output.
• Data format - Type of data that is transferred between the controller and I/O module and what tags are generated when the
configuration is complete.
Module Fault on Controller If Connection This option determines how the controller is affected if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode. You can configure the project
Fails While in Run Mode so that a connection failure causes a major fault on the controller or not.
The default setting is for the option to be enabled, that is, if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode, a major fault occurs on
the controller.

I/O Connections

A Logix5000 system uses connections to transmit I/O data, as described in

Table 33.
Table 33 - I/O Module Connections
Connection Description
Direct A direct connection is a real-time, data-transfer link between the controller and an I/O module. The controller maintains and monitors
the connection. Any break in the connection, such as a module fault, causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area that is
associated with the module.
Typically, analog I/O modules, diagnostic I/O modules, and specialty modules require direct connections.
Rack-optimized For digital I/O modules, you can select rack-optimized communication.
This option is used with distributed I/O modules and the Rack Optimization connection selection is made when configuring the remote
adapter. For example, if you want to use a rack-optimized connection with digital I/O modules in a remote 1734 POINT I/O system, you
configure the 1734-AENT(R) module to use a connection type of Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection consolidates connection usage between the controller and the digital I/O modules in a remote chassis or on
one DIN rail. Rather than having individual, direct connections for each I/O module, there is one connection for the entire rack (or DIN
rail).

258 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
an EtherNet/IP network.
Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network
IMPORTANT When adding distributed I/O modules, remember to count the remote Ethernet
adapter to remain within the maximum number of EtherNet/IP network nodes
limitation for your controller.
The remote I/O modules that are connected to the controller via the Ethernet
adapter are not counted toward the maximum Ethernet node limit for the
controller.
For more information on node limitations, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 130.

Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on an

EtherNet/IP network.

1. Right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 259

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

3. Configure the new Ethernet adapter as necessary and click OK.

4. Right-click the new adapter and choose New Module.

5. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

260 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

6. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

7. Repeat these steps to add the desired distributed I/O modules.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L33ERM control system that uses

distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

1734-AENTR POINT I/O 1769-L33ERM

PanelView Plus

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O 1732E-IB16M12R

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 261

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
a DeviceNet network.
Modules on a DeviceNet
Network Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on a
DeviceNet network.

1. If you have not done so, install a 1769-SDN Compact I/O DeviceNet
scanner into the local bank of your CompactLogix CompactLogix 5370
L3 control system.
2. Right-click 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

3. Select the 1769-SDN scanner and click Create.

4. Choose a Major Revision and click OK.

The New Module dialog box appears.

262 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

5. Configure the new 1769-SDN scanner as necessary and click OK.

6. Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to define the scan list in the
1769-SDN scanner to communicate data between the devices and the
controller through the scanner.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L33ERM control system that uses

distributed I/O modules on a DeviceNet network.

• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-SDN Scanner

1734-ADN POINT I/O 1606-XLDNET 1794-ADN FLEX I/O

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 263

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Monitor I/O Modules With CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers, you can monitor I/O modules in the
following ways:

• Quick View Pane below the Controller Organizer

• Connection tab in the Module Properties dialog box

• Programming logic to monitor fault data so you can act

When a fault occurs on an I/O module, a yellow triangle on the module listing in
the Controller Organizer alerts you to the fault.

The following graphic shows the Quick View Pane, which indicates the type of
fault.

264 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

To see the fault description on the Connection tab in Module Properties dialog
box, complete these steps.

1. In the I/O Configuration, right-click the faulted I/O module and

choose Properties.

2. Click the Connection tab and use the fault description, in the Module
Fault section, to diagnose the issue.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and remedy the issue.

End Cap Detection and Module Faults

End cap detection is performed through the last module on a 1769 Bus. If that
module experiences a fault such that it cannot communicate on the 1769 Bus, the
following events occur:

• End cap detection fails

• Controller faults

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 265

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Notes:

266 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 10

Develop Applications

Topic Page
Elements of a Control Application 267
Tasks 268
Programs 272
Routines 274
Tags 275
Programming Languages 278
Add-On Instructions 279
Access the Module Object 280
Monitoring Controller Status 281
Monitoring I/O Connections 282
System Overhead Time Slice 285

Elements of a Control A control application is comprised of several elements that require planning for
efficient application execution. Application elements include the following:
Application
• Tasks
• Programs
• Routines
• Parameters and Local Tags

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 267

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Figure 38 - Elements of a Control Program

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1
Configuration

Status

Watchdog
Program 1000

Program 1
Program (Local
Main Routine Tags and
Parameters)
Fault Routine

Other
Routines

Controller (global)
Tags I/O Data System-shared Data

Tasks A Logix5000 controller lets you use multiple tasks to schedule and prioritize the
execution of your programs that are based on criteria. This multitasking allocates
the processing time of the controller among the different operations in your
application:
• The controller executes only one task at a time.
• One task can interrupt the execution of another task and take control.
• In any given task, multiple programs can be used. However, only one
program executes at a time.
• You can display tasks in the Controller or Logical Organizer views, as
necessary.

268 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Figure 39 - Task in a Control Application

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1 Task 1
Contains the following: Configuration
• Configuration Data
Status
• Status Data
• Watchdog Data Watchdog
• Programs Program 1000

Program 1
Program (Local
Main Routine Tags and
Parameters)
Fault Routine

Other Routines

Controller (global)
I/O Data System-shared Data
Tags

Figure 40 - Tasks in Application

Controller Organizer Logical Organizer

Main Task
(continuous)

Main Task
(continuous)

Task 2
(periodic)

Task 2
(periodic) Task 3
(event)

Task 3
(event)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 269

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

A task provides scheduling and priority information for a set of one or more
programs. Configure tasks as continuous, periodic, or event by using the Task
Properties dialog box.

Figure 41 - Configuring the Task Type

This table explains the types of tasks you can configure.

Table 34 - Task Types and Execution Frequency

Task Type Task Execution Description
Continuous At all times The continuous task runs in the background. Any CPU time that is not allocated to other operations (such as motion,
communication, and other tasks) is used to execute the programs in the continuous task:
• The continuous task runs constantly. When the continuous task completes a full scan, it restarts immediately.
• A project does not require a continuous task. If used, there can be only one continuous task.
Periodic • At a set interval, such as every A periodic task performs a function at an interval:
100 ms • Whenever the time for the periodic task expires, the task interrupts any lower priority tasks, executes once, and returns
• Multiple times in the scan of control to where the previous task left off.
your other logic • You can configure the time period from 0.1…2,000,000.00 ms. The default is 10 ms. It is also controller and configuration
dependent.
• The performance of a periodic task depends on the type of Logix5000 controller and on the logic in the task.
• The periodic task processes I/O data for CompactLogix, FlexLogix™, DriveLogix™, and SoftLogix™ controllers with the
following considerations:
– For CompactLogix, FlexLogix, and DriveLogix controllers, operates at priority 6
– For SoftLogix controllers, operates at Windows priority 16 (Idle)
– Higher-priority tasks take precedence over the I/O task and can affect processing
– Executes at the fastest RPI you have scheduled for the system
– Executes for as long as it takes to scan the configured I/O modules
Event Immediately when an event occurs An Event task performs a function only when an event (trigger) occurs. The trigger for the Event task can be the following:
• A consumed tag trigger
• An EVENT instruction
• An axis trigger
• A motion event trigger
• Module input data state change
IMPORTANT: With Logix Designer application, version 21.00.00 or later, you can use this trigger with 1756 ControlLogix,
1789 SoftLogix, and CompactLogix 5370 L1 applications.

270 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

The CompactLogix controller supports up to 32 tasks, only one of which can be

continuous.

A task can have up to 1000 separate Programs per task, each with its own
executable routines and program-scoped tags. Once a task is triggered (activated),
all programs that are assigned to the task execute in the order in which they are
grouped. Multiple tasks cannot share Programs and Programs appear only once in
the Controller Organizer.

Task Priority

Each task in the controller has a priority level. The operating system uses the
priority level to determine which task to execute when multiple tasks are
triggered. A higher priority task interrupts any lower priority task. A periodic or
event task interrupts the continuous task, which has the lowest priority.

You can configure periodic tasks to execute from the lowest priority of 15 up to
the highest priority of 1. Configure the task priority by using the Task Properties
dialog box.

Figure 42 - Configure the Task Priority

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 271

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Programs The controller operating system is a preemptive multitasking system that is in

compliance with IEC 1131-3. This system provides the following:
• Programs to group data and logic
• Routines to encapsulate executable code that is written in one
programming language

Each program contains the following:

• Local Tags
• Parameters
• A main executable routine
• Other routines
• An optional fault routine

Figure 43 - Program in a Control Application

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1
Configuration

Status

Watchdog
Program 1000

Program 1
Program 1 Program (Local
Contains the following: Tags and
Main Routine
• Main Routine Parameters)
• Fault Routine
• Other Routines Fault Routine
• Program Tags

Other Routines

Controller (global) Tags I/O Data System-shared Data

272 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Figure 44 - Programs in Application

Controller Organizer Logical Organizer

Program
Program

Program
Program

Scheduled and Unscheduled Programs

The scheduled programs in a task execute to completion from first to last.
Programs that are not attached to any task show up as unscheduled programs.

Unscheduled programs in a task are downloaded to the controller with the entire
project. The controller verifies unscheduled programs but does not execute them.

You must schedule a program in a task before the controller can scan the
program. To schedule an unscheduled program, use the Program/Phase Schedule
tab of the Task Properties dialog box.

Figure 45 - Scheduling an Unscheduled Program

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 273

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Routines A routine is a set of logic instructions in one programming language, such as

Ladder Diagram (ladder logic). Routines provide the executable code for the
project in a controller. A routine is similar to a program file or subroutine in a
™
PLC or SLC processor.

Each program has a main routine. This is the first routine to execute when the
controller triggers the associated task and calls the associated program. Use logic,
such as the Jump to Subroutine ( JSR) instruction, to call other routines.

You can also specify an optional program fault routine. The controller executes
this routine if it encounters an instruction-execution fault in any of the routines
in the associated program.

Figure 46 - Routines in a Control Application

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1
Configuration

Status

Watchdog
Program 1000

Program 1
Program (Local
Main Routine Tags and
Parameters)
Fault Routine

Other Routines

Controller (global)
Tags I/O Data System-shared Data

Figure 47 - Routines in Application

Controller Designer Logical Designer

Routine
Routine

Routine
Routine

274 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Tags With a Logix5000 controller, you use a tag (alphanumeric name) to address data
(variables). In Logix5000 controllers, there is no fixed, numeric format. For
example, as shown in the following figure, you can use the tag name
north_tank_mix instead of a numeric format, such as N7:0.0.

The tag name itself identifies the data. The tag lets you do the following:
• Organize your data to mirror your machinery.
• Document your application as you develop it.

This example shows data tags that are created in the scope of the Main Program
of the controller.

Figure 48 - Tags Example

Controller Organizer - Main Program Parameters and Local Tags

Program Tags Window - Main Program Tags

Analog I/O Device

Integer Value
Storage Bit
Counter
Timer
Digital I/O Device

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 275

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

There are several guidelines for creating and configuring parameters and local
tags for optimal task and program execution. For more information, see the
Logix5000 Controllers and I/O Tag Data Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM004.

Extended Properties
The Extended Properties feature lets you define more information, such as limits,
engineering units, or state identifiers, for various components within your
controller project.

Component Extended Properties

Tag In the Tag Editor, add extended properties to a tag.
User-defined data type In the Data Type Editor, add extended properties to data types.
Add-On Instructions In the properties that are associated with the Add-On Instruction definition, add
extended properties to Add-On Instructions.

Pass-through behavior is the ability to assign extended properties at a higher level

of a structure or Add-On Instruction and have that extended property
automatically available for all members. Pass-through behavior is available for
descriptions, state identifiers, and engineering units and you can configure it.
Configure pass-through behavior on the Project tab of the Controller Properties
dialog box. If you choose not to show pass-through properties, only extended
properties that have been configured for a given component are displayed.

Pass-through behavior is not available for limits. When an instance of a tag is

created, if limits are associated with the data type, the instance is copied.

You must know which tags have limits that are associated with them as there is no
indication in the tag browser that extended properties are defined for a tag. If,
however, you try to use extended properties that have not been defined for a tag,
the editors show a visual indication and the routine does not verify.

Access Extended Properties in Logic

You can access limits that are defined on tags by using the .@Min and .@Max
syntax:
• You cannot write to extended properties values in logic.
• To use extended tag properties in an Add-On Instruction, you must pass
them in as input operands to the Add-On Instruction.
• Alias tags that have extended properties cannot access the extended
properties in logic.
• Limits can be configured for input and output parameters in Add-On
Instructions. However, limits cannot be defined on an InOut parameter of
an Add-On Instruction.
• Limits cannot be accessed inside Add-On Instruction logic. Limits are for
use only by HMI applications.

276 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

If an array tag is using indirect addressing to access limits in logic, the following
conditions apply:
• If the array tag has limits that are configured, the extended properties are
applied to any array element that does not explicitly have that particular
extended property configured. For example, if the array tag MyArray has
Max configured to 100, any element of the array that does not have Max
configured inherits the value of 100 when being used in logic. However, it
is not visible to you that the value inherited from MyArray is configured in
the tag properties.
• At least one array element must have a limit that is configured for
indirectly referenced array logic to verify. For example, if
MyArray[x].@Max is being used in logic, at least one array element of
MyArray[] must have Max extended property that is configured if
MyArray has not configured Max.
• Under the following circumstances a data type default value is used:
– Array is accessed programmatically with indirect reference.
– Array tag does not have the extended property configured.
– A member of an array does not have the extended property configured.

For example, for an array of SINT type, when max limit is called in logic
for a member, use the value of 127.

If an array element is directly accessed, the element has to have the extended
property defined. If not, verification fails.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 277

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Programming Languages The CompactLogix controller supports these programming languages, online,
and offline.

Table 35 - CompactLogix Controller Programming Languages

Language Is best-used in programs with
Relay ladder Continuous or parallel execution of multiple operations (not sequenced)
Boolean or bit-based operations
Complex logical operations
Message and communication processing
Machine interlocking
Operations that service or maintenance personnel can have to interpret to
troubleshoot the machine or process
Function block diagram Continuous process and drive control
Loop control
Calculations in circuit flow
Sequential function chart (SFC) High-level management of multiple operations
Repetitive sequence of operations
Batch process
Motion control using structured text
State machine operations
Structured text Complex mathematical operations
Specialized array or table loop processing
ASCII string handling or protocol processing

For information about programming in these languages, see the Logix5000

Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM001.

278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Add-On Instructions You can design and configure sets of commonly used instructions to increase
project consistency. Similar to the built-in instructions contained in Logix5000
controllers, these instructions you create are called Add-On Instructions.
Add-On Instructions reuse common control algorithms. With them, you can do
the following:
• Ease maintenance by animating logic for one instance.
• Protect intellectual property with Source Protection.
• Reduce documentation development time.

You can use Add-On Instructions across multiple projects. You can define your
instructions, obtain them from somebody else, or copy them from another
project.

This table explains some of the capabilities and advantages of use Add-On
Instructions.

Table 36 - Add-On Instruction Capabilities

Capability Description
Save Time With Add-On Instructions, you can combine your most commonly used logic into sets of reusable instructions. You save time when you
create instructions for your projects and share them with others. Add-On Instructions increase project consistency because commonly
used algorithms all work in the same manner, regardless of who implements the project.
Use Standard Editors You create Add-On Instructions by using one of three editors:
• Relay Ladder
• Function Block Diagram
• Structured Text
Once you have created instructions, you can use them in any editor.
Export Add-On Instructions You can export Add-On Instructions to other projects and copy and paste them from one project to another. Give each instruction a
unique name so that you don’t accidentally overwrite another instruction of the same name.
Use Context Views Context views let you visualize the logic of an instruction for an instant, which simplifies online troubleshooting of your Add-On
Instructions. Each instruction contains a revision, a change history, and an auto-generated help page.
Create Custom Help When you create an instruction, you enter information for the description fields in dialogs, information that becomes what is known as
Custom Help. Custom Help makes it easier for you to get the help you need when implementing the instructions.
Apply Source Protection As the creator of Add-On Instructions, you can limit users of your instructions to read-only access, or you can bar access to the internal
logic or local parameters that are used by the instructions. This source protection lets you stop unwanted changes to your instructions
and protects your intellectual property.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 279

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Once defined in a project, Add-On Instructions behave similarly to the built-in

instructions in Logix5000 controllers. They appear on the instruction tool bar
for easy access, as do internal instructions.

Figure 49 - Add-On Instructions

Controller Organizer Instruction Toolbar

Access the Module Object The MODULE object provides status information about a module. To select a
particular module object, set the Object Name operand of the GSV/SSV
instruction to the module name. The specified module must be present in the
I/O Configuration section of the controller organizer and must have a device
name.

Create the Add-On Instruction

With Logix Designer application, version 24.00.00 and later, you can access a
MODULE object directly from an Add-On Instruction. Previously, you could
access the MODULE object data but not from within an Add-On Instruction.

You must create a Module Reference parameter when you define the Add-On
Instruction to access the MODULE object data. A Module Reference parameter
is an InOut parameter of the MODULE data type that points to the MODULE
Object of a hardware module. You can use module reference parameters in both
Add-On Instruction logic and program logic.

For more information on the Module Reference parameter, see the Logix5000
Controllers Add-On Instructions Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM010 and the Logix Designer application online help.

280 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

The MODULE object uses the following attributes to provide status

information:
• EntryStatus
• FaultCode
• FaultInfo
• FWSupervisorStatus
• ForceStatus
• Instance
• LEDStatus
• Mode
• Path

The Path attribute is available with Logix Designer application, version 24.00.00
and later. This attribute provides a communication path to the module.

For more information on the attributes available in the MODULE object, see the
Logix 5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM003.

Monitoring Controller Status The CompactLogix controller uses Get System Value (GSV) and Set System
Value (SSV) instructions to get and set (change) controller data. The controller
®
stores system data in objects. There is no status file, as in the PLC-5 processor.

The GSV instruction retrieves the specified information and places it in the
destination. The SSV instruction sets the specified attribute with data from the
source. The instructions are available from the Input/Output tab of the
Instruction tool bar.

Figure 50 - GSV and SSV Instructions for Monitoring

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 281

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

When you add a GSV/SSV instruction to the program, the object classes, object
names, and attribute names for each instruction are displayed. For the GSV
instruction, you can get values for the available attributes. For the SSV
instruction, only those attributes you are allowed to set are displayed.

Some object types appear repeatedly, so you have to specify the object name. For
example, there can be several tasks in your application. Each task has its own Task
object that you access by the task name.

There are several objects and attributes that you can use the GSV and SSV
instructions to monitor and set the system. For more information about GSV
instructions, SSV instructions, objects, and attributes see the Logix5000
Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003.

Monitoring I/O Connections If communication with a device in the I/O configuration of the controller does
not occur in an application-specific period, the communication times out and the
controller produces warnings.

The minimum timeout period that, once expired without communication, causes
a timeout is 100 ms. The timeout period can be greater, depending on the RPI of
the application. For example, if your application uses the default RPI = 20 ms, the
timeout period is 160 ms.

For more information on how to determine the time for your application, see
Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase Tech Note 38535. The document is
available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase/.

When a timeout does occur, the controller produces these warnings:

• An I/O fault status code is indicated on the status display of the

CompactLogix 5370 controller.

• The I/O status indicator on the front of the CompactLogix 5370

controller flashes green.

• A ! shows over the I/O configuration folder and over the devices that
have timed out.

• A module fault code is produced, which you can access via the following:
– The Module Properties dialog box
– A GSV instruction

For more information about I/O faults, see the Major, Minor, and I/O Faults
Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM014.

282 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Determine if I/O Communication has Timed Out

This example can be used with the CompactLogix 5370 controllers:

• The GSV instruction gets the status of the I/O status indicator (via the
LEDStatus attribute of the Module object) and stores it in the
IO_LED tag.
• IO_LED is a DINT tag that stores the status of the I/O status indicator or
status display on the front of the controller.
• If IO_LED equals 2, then at least one I/O connection has been lost and
the Fault_Alert is set.

Figure 51 - GSV Used to Identify I/O Timeout

For more information about attributes available with the Module object, see the
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM003.

Determine if I/O Communication to a Specific I/O Module has

Timed Out

If communication times out with a device (module) in the I/O configuration of

the controller, the controller produces a fault code and fault information for the
module. You can use GSV instructions to get fault code and information via the
FaultCode and FaultInfo attributes of the Module object.

For more information about attributes available with the Module object, see the
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM003.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 283

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Interrupt the Execution of Logic and Execute the Fault Handler

Depending on your application, you can want an I/O connection error to cause
the Controller Fault Handler to execute. To do so, set the module property that
causes a major fault to result from an I/O connection error. The major fault
causes the execution of the Controller Fault Handler.

First, develop a routine in the Controller Fault Handler that can respond to I/O
connection faults. In the Module Properties dialog box of the I/O module or
parent communication module, check Major Fault On Controller If Connection
Fails While in Run Mode.

Figure 52 - I/O Connection Fault Causes Major Fault

I/O Module Properties

Parent Communication Module Properties

For more information about programming the Controller Fault Handler, see the
Major, Minor, and I/O Faults Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM014.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

System Overhead Time Slice The controller communicates with other devices at a specified rate (scheduled) or
when there is processing time available to service the communication.

The system overhead time slice specifies the percentage of time a controller
devotes to service communication. If you have a continuous task, the System
Overhead Time Slice entered in the Advanced tab of the Controller Properties
dialog box specifies continuous task/service communication ratio. However, if
there is no continuous task, the overhead time slice has no effect.

The table shows the ratio between the continuous task and service
communication at various system overhead time slices.

Table 37 - Ratio between Continuous Task and Service Communication

At this time slice The continuous task runs Service communication occurs for up to
10% 9 ms 1 ms
20% 4 ms 1 ms
25% 3 ms 1 ms
33% 2 ms 1 ms
50% 1 ms 1 ms
66% 1 ms 2 ms
75% 1 ms 3 ms
80% 1 ms 4 ms
90% 1 ms 9 ms

As shown in Table 37, if the system overhead time slice is less than or equal to
50%, the duration stays fixed at 1 ms. The same applies for 66% and higher,
except there are multiple 1 ms intervals. For example, at 66% there are two 1 ms
intervals of consecutive time and at 90% there are nine 1 ms intervals of
consecutive time.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 285

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Configure the System Overhead Time Slice

To configure the system overhead time slice, perform this procedure.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click the controller and

choose Properties.

The Controller Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Enter a numeric value in the System Overhead Time Slice box.
4. Use Run Continuous Task (default) or Reserve for System Tasks.
– Click Run Continue Task when there is no communication or
background tasks to process; controller immediately returns to the
continuous task.
– Click Reserve for System Task to allocates the entire 1 ms of the system
overhead time slice whether the controller has communication or
background tasks to perform before returning back to the continuous
task. This lets you simulate a communication load on the controller
during design and programming before HMIs, controller to controller
messaging, and so forth, are configured.
5. Click OK.

286 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Sample Controller Projects

The application includes sample projects that you can copy and modify to fit
your application. To access the sample projects, complete these steps.

1. From the File menu, choose Open.

2. Browse to the sample projects list and select a sample project.

3. Click Open.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 287

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Notes:

288 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 11

Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP

Network Application

Topic Page
Motion Axes Support 290
Maximum Number of Position Loop-configured Drives 291
Time Synchronization 292
Configure Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 293
Scalability in Applications Using Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Networks 297

Some of the CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over an

EtherNet/IP network, a motion solution on a standard, unmodified EtherNet/IP
network with simple design or configuration that is compared to traditional
motion applications.

IMPORTANT The following CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over
an EtherNet/IP network:
• 1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller
• 1769-L30ERM controller
• 1769-L33ERM controller
• 1769-L36ERM controller

Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP applications use the following:

• Standard EtherNet/IP network
• High performance drives, including the following:
– Kinetix 350 drives
– Kinetix 5500 drives
– Kinetix 6500 drives
– PowerFlex 755 drives
• Standard infrastructure components
• Programming software

For a complete description of how to use a CompactLogix 5370 controller in an

application that uses Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see the
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User
Manual, publication MOTION-UM003.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 289

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application

Motion Axes Support The 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM,

1769-L33ERM, and 1769-L36ERM controllers support these axes:
• AXIS_VIRTUAL
• AXIS_CIP_DRIVE

AXIS_VIRTUAL Axis
The AXIS_VIRTUAL axis is an internal axis representation that is not
associated with any physical drives. That is, you can configure the axis but it does
not cause any physical motion in your system.

AXIS_CIP_DRIVE Axis

The AXIS_CIP_DRIVE axis is a motion axis that is used with physical drives to
cause physical motion in your system as determined by your application.

Configuration Types

When adding an axis to your project, you must associate the axis to a drive.
Among other configuration parameters, you must select a configuration type.
The axis configuration type is also considered the drive configuration type.

For example, an AXIS_CIP_DRIVE axis can use a Position Loop configuration

and be associated with a Kinetix 350 drive. The axis is considered a Position
Loop-configured axis and the associated drive is considered a Position Loop-
configured drive.

The following drives support these configuration types:

• Kinetix 350, Kinetix 5500, and Kinetix 6500 drives
– Position loop
– Velocity loop
– Torque loop

• PowerFlex 755 drive

– Position loop
– Velocity loop
– Torque loop
– Frequency control

290 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application Chapter 11

Maximum Number of The CompactLogix 5370 controllers support a maximum number of

EtherNet/IP nodes in a project. Any device added to the local Ethernet node in
Position Loop-configured the I/O configuration is counted toward the node limitation of the controller.
Drives For more information, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 130.

Drives are counted among the number of nodes in the I/O Configuration section
of the Studio 5000 environment. If you use the maximum number of drives that a
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM,
1769-L33ERM, or 1769-L36ERM controller supports in one system, you cannot
add other EtherNet/IP devices to that project.

Position Loop-configured Drive Limits

Among the maximum number drives supported by the controllers, there is a
maximum number of Position Loop-configured drives that are supported in the
project for the controller.

For example, the 1769-L30ERM controller supports a maximum of four Position

Loop-configured drives.

Table 38 lists motion-related specification information for the controllers that

support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.
Table 38 - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Supporting Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP
Network
Controller Type Drive Types Supported Number of Drives Number of Position
Supported, max Loop-configured Drives
Supported, max
1769-L18ERM-BB1B 8 2
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 16 4
Kinetix 350
1769-L30ERM Kinetix 6500 16 4
PowerFlex 755
1769-L33ERM 32 8
1769-L36ERM 48 16

If your solution requires more than 16 Position Loop-configured drives, consider

using the ControlLogix platform. The ControlLogix platform enables up to 100
Position Loop-configured drives.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 291

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application

Time Synchronization Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network requires Time Synchronization,
also known as CIP Sync. CIP Sync provides accurate real-time (real-world time)
or Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) synchronization of CompactLogix 5370
controllers and devices that are connected over an EtherNet/IP network.

CIP Sync is a time-synchronization protocol that can be applied to various

applications. This chapter focuses on using the protocol in applications with
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.

In a CompactLogix system, the following devices are CIP Sync-capable:

• All CompactLogix 5370 controllers - Required

IMPORTANT While all CompactLogix 5370 controllers are CIP Sync-capable, not all
controllers support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.
A controller must be CIP Sync-capable and synchronized with other
devices on the EtherNet/IP network to support Integrated Motion over
an EtherNet/IP network. However, the condition of being CIP
Sync-capable does not exclusively qualify a CompactLogix 5370
controller to support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.
Table 38 on page 291 lists the CompactLogix 5370 controllers that
support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.

All controllers and communication modules must have time synchronization

enabled to participate in CIP Sync.

CIP Sync requires that devices in the system function in the following roles:

• Grandmaster, also known as the coordinated system time (CST) master -

Sets time for entire system and passes the time to a Master

• Master - Sets time for its backplane

• Slave - Uses time set by Master

292 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application Chapter 11

Configure Integrated Motion To use Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network, complete these steps.
on the EtherNet/IP Network
IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps apply to other
CompactLogix 5370 controllers that support Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network with slight variations in screens.

1. Enable Time Synchronization.

2. Add a Drive.

IMPORTANT This section assumes that you have previously created a project for your
1769-L36ERM controller. If you have not, do so before continuing.

Enable Time Synchronization

Configuring Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network begins with

enabling time synchronization in a CompactLogix 5370 controller.

To enable Time Synchronization on a CompactLogix 5370 controller, complete

these steps.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click your controller and

choose Properties.

The Controller Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Date/Time tab.
3. Click Enable Time Synchronization.
4. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 293

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application

Add a Drive

You can only use these drives in an application that uses Integrated Motion over
an EtherNet/IP network:
• Kinetix 350 drive
• Kinetix 6500 drive
• PowerFlex 755 AC drive

IMPORTANT These steps show a Kinetix 350 drive in a 1769-L36ERM control system. The
same steps apply to other CompactLogix 5370 controllers that support
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network with slight variations in
screens.

1. In the I/O configuration tree, right-click the Ethernet network and choose
New Module.

The Select Module Type dialog box appears.

2. Select the desired drive and click Create.

294 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application Chapter 11

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Type a name for the module.
4. Type a description, if desired.
5. Assign an EtherNet/IP address.

For information on setting the IP addresses, see the publications for each
drive type that is listed on page 12.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 295

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application

6. If you must change the configuration for any of the following parameters,
click Change in the Module Definition area:
• Revision
• Electronic Keying
• Connection
• Power Structure
• Verify Power Rating on Connection

The Module dialog box appears.

7. Make the desired changes and click OK.

8. Click OK to create the drive in your project.
9. Add other components that your project requires.

296 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application Chapter 11

Scalability in Applications CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer varying levels of flexibility and scalability
to operate in control systems using Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP networks.
Using Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP Networks
1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ERM, and 1769-L36ERM Controllers

You can use the following controllers in control systems that require simpler
configuration and complex configuration of Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP
networks parameters:
• 1769-L30ERM
• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-L36ERM

Control Systems Requiring Simple Configuration

Relatively simple control systems that use Integrated Motion over an

EtherNet/IP networks often include unmanaged switches, such as a
Stratix 2000 switch, and Kinetix 350 drives, as shown in this example.

1769-L33ERM

Stratix 2000

PowerFlex 755
PanelView Plus

Kinetix 350

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 297

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application

Control Systems Requiring Complex Configuration

Complex control systems that use Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP

network often include managed switches, such as a Stratix 6000 switch, and
Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755 drives, as shown in this example.

1769-L33ERM

PanelView Plus Stratix 6000

Kinetix 350

Kinetix 6500

POINT I/O
PowerFlex 755

298 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application Chapter 11

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Controller

The 1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller is typically used in control systems that

require simpler configuration regarding using Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network.

The simpler control system often includes unmanaged switches, such a

Stratix 2000 switch, and Kinetix 350 drives, as shown in this example.

1769-L18ERM-BB1B

Stratix 2000

PowerFlex 755
PanelView Plus

Kinetix 350

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 299

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Application

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller

The 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller is typically used in control systems that

require simpler configuration regarding using Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network.

The simpler control system often includes unmanaged switches, such a

Stratix 2000 switch, and Kinetix 350 drives, as shown in this example.

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

Stratix 2000

PowerFlex 755
PanelView Plus

Kinetix 350

For more information on Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see

the publications that are listed on page 12.

300 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Chapter 12

Use a Secure Digital Card

This chapter describes the primary tasks that are required to store a project on an
SD card or load a project from an SD card to the CompactLogix 5370 controller.

Topic Page
Store or Load a Project with the Secure Digital Card 303
Store a Project 304
Load a Project 307

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of nonvolatile media is dependent on the number of write
cycles that are performed. Nonvolatile media use a wear leveling technique, or
technology for prolonging the service life, but avoid frequent writes.
Avoid frequent writes when logging data. We recommend that you log data to
a buffer in the memory of your controller and limit the number of times data is
written to removable media.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers support nonvolatile storage through the

following SD cards:

• 1784-SD1 - Ships with CompactLogix 5370 controller and offers 1 GB of

memory. You can order more 1784-SD1 cards if desired.

• 1784-SD2 cards - Available for separate purchase and offer 2 GB of

memory.

For information on how to install or remove an SD card from a

CompactLogix 5370 controller, see Install the Secure Digital Card on page 65

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 301

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

IMPORTANT We recommend that you leave the SD card installed in the controller and the
card unlocked. The SD card saves extended diagnostic information that you can
send to Rockwell Automation that provides enhanced diagnostics of your
application and firmware revision if circumstances require this data.
This section briefly describes how to use the SD card when installed in a
CompactLogix 5370 controller, that is, how to store a project from the
controller to the SD card and how to load a project from the SD card to the
controller.
However, you can complete other tasks by using the SD card, such as
the following:
• Change the image that is loaded from the card
• Check for a load that was completed
• Clear an image from the memory card
• Store an empty image
• Change load parameters
• Read/write application data to the card
For more detailed information about using an SD card, see the Logix5000
Controllers Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM017.

302 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use a Secure Digital Card Chapter 12

Store or Load a Project with There are several options for when to load the project back into the user memory
(RAM) of the CompactLogix 5370 controller. The controller configuration
the Secure Digital Card determines the option that is used.

The following table describes the conditions in which a project is loaded from as
described in the following table.

Condition to Load Required Setting in Notes

Project from an SD Controller
Card into Controller Configuration
RAM
Controller power-up On Power Up • During a power cycle, you lose any online changes and tag
values you have not stored on the memory card.
• A load from a memory card can also change the firmware of the
controller.
• For more information, see the Logix5000 Controllers
Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM017.
• You can use the application to load the project.
No project in the On Corrupt Memory • During a power cycle, you lose any online changes and tag
controller and you values you have not stored on the memory card.
power up the • A load from a memory card can also change the firmware of the
controller controller.
• For more information, see the Logix5000 Controllers
Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM017.
• You can use the application to load the project.
Only through User Initiated You lose any online changes and tag values you have not stored on
application the memory card.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 303

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

Store a Project Follow these steps to store a project. These steps show a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
controller. The same steps apply for other CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

1. Go online with the controller.

2. Put the controller in Program mode, that is, Remote Program or Program.
3. On the Online tool bar, click the controller properties icon.

4. Click the Nonvolatile Memory tab.

5. Click Load/Store.

TIP If Load/Store is dimmed (unavailable), verify the following:

• You have specified the correct communication path and are online with the
controller.
• The memory card is installed.
If the memory card is not installed, a message in the lower-left corner of the
Nonvolatile Memory tab indicates the missing card as shown here.

304 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use a Secure Digital Card Chapter 12

6. Choose under what conditions to load the project into the user memory of
the controller.
Project that is currently on the memory card of Project that is currently in the user memory of
the controller (if any project is there). the controller.

If you choose On Power Up or On Corrupt Memory, you must also choose

the mode that you want the controller to go to after the load:
• Remote Program
• Remote Run
7. In the Automatic Firmware Update box, use the default (disable) or choose
the firmware supervisor option.

IMPORTANT The Firmware Supervisor option is not used to upgrade the

controller firmware.

8. Click <- Store.

IMPORTANT Store is not active if a SD card is locked.

A dialog box asks for confirmation of the store.

9. To store the project, click Yes.
10. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 305

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

After you click Store, the project is saved to the SD card as indicated by the
controller status indicators. These conditions can exist:

• While the store is in progress, the following occurs:

– The OK indicator is flashing green.

– The SD indicator is flashing green.
– A dialog box indicates that the store is in progress.

• When the store is complete, the following occurs:

– The controller resets itself.

When the controller is resetting itself, the status indicators execute a
sequence of state changes, for example, a brief time with the OK status
indicator in the solid red state. Wait for the controller to complete the
sequence.

– After the controller fully resets itself, the OK indicator is solid green.

– The SD indicator is off.

IMPORTANT Allow the store to complete without interruption. If you interrupt the
store, data corruption or loss can occur.

306 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Use a Secure Digital Card Chapter 12

Load a Project Follow these steps to use the application to load the project from an SD card.
These steps show a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller. The same steps apply for
other CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

1. Go online with the controller.

2. Put the controller in Program mode, that is, Remote Program or Program.
3. On the Online tool bar, click the controller properties icon.

4. Click the Nonvolatile Memory tab.

5. Click Load/Store.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 307

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

6. Click Load.
Project that is currently on the memory card of the Project that is currently in the user memory of
controller (if any project is there). the controller.

A dialog box prompts you to confirm the load.

7. To load the project, click Yes.
8. Click OK.

After you click Load, the project is loaded into the controller as indicated by the
controller status indicators. These conditions can exist:

• While the load is in progress, the following occurs:

– The controller resets itself.

When the controller is resetting itself, the status indicators execute a
sequence of state changes, for example, a brief time with the OK status
indicator in the solid red state. Wait for the controller to complete the
sequence.

– After the controller fully resets itself, the OK indicator is solid green.

– The SD indicator is off.

308 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Appendix A

Troubleshoot the Module

This section explains how to interpret the status indicators on your

CompactLogix 5370 controllers. All controllers use the status indicators that are
described in the following table.

Status Indicator Description

RUN Indicates the operating mode of the controller.
FORCE Indicates the force state.
I/O Indicates the current state of communication between the controller and I/O modules.
OK Indicates the state of the controller.
NS Indicates the EtherNet/IP network status regarding the controller operating on the
network.
LINK 1 Indicates the EtherNet/IP link status for port 1 if the controller.
LINK 2 Indicates the EtherNet/IP link status for port 2 of the controller.
SD Indicates if there is activity on the SD card.

Use Logix Designer The Logix Designer application indicates fault conditions in the following ways:
Application for Warning signal on the main screen next to the module - This occurs when the
Troubleshooting connection to the module is broken. The controller state also indicates Faulted
and the Controller fault is illuminated in red.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 309

Appendix A Troubleshoot the Module

Message in the status line of a screen.

On the Module Info tab, in the Status section, the Major and Minor Faults are
listed along with the Internal State of the module.

Notification in the Tag Editor - General module faults are also reported in the
Tag Editor. Diagnostic faults are reported only in the tag editor.

The Value field indicates a fault with the number 1.

310 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Troubleshoot the Module Appendix A

Fault Type Determination

To display recent fault information in the Major Faults tab of the Module
Properties screen, you must check the Major Fault on Controller option in the
Connection tab.

When you are monitoring the configuration properties of a module in the Logix
Designer application and receive a Communication fault message, the Major
Faults tab indicates the type of fault under Recent Faults.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 311

Appendix A Troubleshoot the Module

Use the CompactLogix 5370 The following graphic shows the controller status indicators for all
CompactLogix 5370 controllers.
Controllers Status Indicators

Table 39 - Controller Mode (RUN) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off The controller is in Program or Test mode.
Green The controller is in Run mode.

Table 40 - Force State (FORCE) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off No tags contain I/O force values. I/O forces are inactive (disabled).
Yellow I/O forces are active (enabled). I/O force values can exist.
Flashing yellow One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off condition, but
the forces have not been enabled.

Table 41 - I/O State (I/O) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off One of the following conditions exists:
• There are no devices in the I/O configuration of the controller. - Applies to only
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers.
• The controller does not contain a project.
Green The controller is communicating with all devices in its I/O configuration.
Flashing green One or more devices in the I/O configuration of the controller are not responding.
Flashing red One of the following conditions exists:
• The controller is not communicating with any devices.
• A fault has occurred on the controller. - Only CompactLogix 5370 L1 and L2
controllers.

Table 42 - Controller Status (OK) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off No power is applied.
Green The controller is OK.
Flashing green The controller is storing a project to or loading a project from the SD card.

312 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Troubleshoot the Module Appendix A

Table 42 - Controller Status (OK) Status Indicator

Status Description
Red The controller detected a nonrecoverable major fault and cleared the project
from memory.
Flashing red One of the following:
• The controller requires a firmware update.
• A major recoverable fault occurred on the controller.
• A nonrecoverable major fault occurred on the controller and cleared the program
from memory.
• A controller firmware update is in process.
• An embedded I/O module firmware update is in process. - Only CompactLogix 5370
L1 controllers.
Dim green to red Save to Flash at power-down.

Table 43 - Ethernet Network Status (NS) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off The port is not initialized; it does not have an IP address and is operating in BOOTP or
DHCP mode.
Green The port has an IP address and CIP connections are established.
Flashing green The port has an IP address, but no CIP connections are established.
Red The port has detected that the assigned IP address is in use.
Flashing red/green The port is performing its power-up self test.

Table 44 - Ethernet Link Status (LINK 1/LINK 2) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off One of the following conditions exists:
• No link.
• Port administratively disabled.
• Port disabled because rapid ring fault condition was detected (LINK2).
Green One of the following conditions exists:
• A 100 Mbps link (half- or full-duplex) exists, no activity.
• A 10 Mbps link (half- or full-duplex) exists, no activity.
• Ring network is operating normally and the controller is the active supervisor.
• Ring network has encountered a rare partial network fault and the controller is the
active supervisor.
Flashing green One of the following conditions exists:
• A 100 Mbps link exists and there is activity.
• A 10 Mbps link exists and there is activity.

Table 45 - SD Card Activity (SD) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off There is no activity to the SD card.
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the SD card.
Flashing red The SD card does not have a file system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 313

Appendix A Troubleshoot the Module

Notes:

314 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Appendix B

Replacement Considerations

The CompactLogix L1 Series B controller is a direct replacement for the Series A

controller. The Series B controller has an improved power supply circuit to the
isolated power supply so that a second power supply is no longer needed.

The Series A controller requires two power supplies:

• One to supply the controller power (VDC)
• One to supply the field power (FP)

Product Comparison Power Considerations

CompactLogix L1 Series A and Series B

Characteristics CompactLogix L1 Series B CompactLogix L1 Series A
Power dissipation 11.5 W 12 W
Recommended external short circuit User-provided 4...5 A @ 3.15...5.5 User-provided 4...6 A @
protection, field power A2t fuse 52.5...68.25 A2t fuse
Embedded power supply 24V DC input, isolated 24V DC input, non-isolated
Line requirement (V DC), min 30VA 50VA
Current draw @ 24V DC, field power, 3 A @ 24V DC N/A
max

Embedded DC Input Considerations

CompactLogix L1 Series A and Series B

Characteristics CompactLogix L1 Series B CompactLogix L1 Series A
Off-state current, max 1 mA 1.5 mA
Input impedance, max 5.4 kΩ 4.7 kΩ

Firmware Compatibility

CompactLogix L1 Series A and Series B

Firmware Revision
20.011 20.012 20.013 20.014 20.011 23.012 24.011
Series A yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Series B no no no yes no no yes

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 315

Appendix B Replacement Considerations

Dimensions There are no dimension differences between the Series A controller and the
Series B controller.

316 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Replacement Considerations Appendix B

Power Supply Wiring Series B Wiring

Series A Wiring

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 317

Appendix B Replacement Considerations

Examples

Replace the Controller and Update the Firmware

In this example:
• Replace a Series A controller with a Series B controller
• Update controller firmware from V21 to V23

Requirements:
Category Tasks
Power Supply Wiring The series B controller requires only one power supply,
but the Series B controller does support two power
supplies. You can retain the current power supply
design for the Series A controller and avoid rewiring.
Controller Firmware Install firmware, V24
Programming Software Install the Studio 5000 environment, V24
Personal Computer Windows 7

Replace the Controller

In this example:
• Replace a Series A controller with a Series B controller
• Leave controller at firmware version 20

Requirements:
Category Tasks
Power Supply Wiring The Series B controller requires only one power supply,
but the Series B controller does support two power
supplies. You can retain the current power supply design
for the Series A controller and avoid rewiring.
Controller Firmware Install Firmware, V20
Programming Software No change required
Personal Computer Windows XP

318 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Appendix C

Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix

5370 Controllers

This appendix explains how to connect power to the series A L1 CompactLogix

5370 controllers.

Topic Page
CompactLogix 5370 L1, Series A, Controller Power Connection 319
CompactLogix 5370 L1, Series A, Controller Field Power to I/O Devices Connection 324

CompactLogix 5370 L1,

Series A, Controller Power IMPORTANT This section describes how to power the controller via the VDC+ and VDC-
Connection terminals.
Connections to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals do not provide power to input or
output devices that are connected to the embedded I/O modules of the
controller or local expansion modules. Power must be connected to the FP+
and FP- terminals to provide power to input or output devices that are
connected to the embedded I/O modules of the controller or local expansion
modules.
For more information on how to provide power to input or output devices that
are connected to the embedded I/O modules of the controller and local
expansion modules, see page 324.

The external power supply must be dedicated to the embedded supply of the
controller. The external power supply converts 115/230V AC power to 24V DC
or other application-required DC voltage that is within the operating range of
the controller.

WARNING: Do not connect directly to line voltage. Line voltage must be

supplied by a suitable, approved isolating transformer or power supply having
short circuit capacity not exceeding 100VA maximum or equivalent. The
controller power requirement is 50VA.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 319

Appendix C Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

Power is connected to the controller via a removable connector that is connected

to the front of the controller. The following graphic shows the connector.

IMPORTANT The controller is grounded once it is installed on a DIN rail as described in

Mount the System on page 24.

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect an external 24V DC power source

to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

For information on how to provide field power to input and output

devices that are connected to the embedded I/O modules of the controller
and local expansion modules via the removable connector, see page 152.

ATTENTION: You must use an external power supply that is Class 2 or

SELV-listed.

• The external power supply that provides power to the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller must be dedicated to power
the controller.

• You must use a separate, dedicated external 24V DC power source to

connect power to other terminals on the removable connector and devices
in the system, for example, the FP+ terminal or a barcode scanner,
respectively.

• The external 24V DC power source that is connected to the VDC+ and
VDC- terminals on the removable connector must reside in the same
enclosure as the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

• Use a power source that most effectively meets your application needs.
That is, calculate The power requiremetns for your application before
choosing a power source to avoid using a power source that far exceeds
your application requirements.

• This section assumes that any DIN rail you use has been grounded
following Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
publication 1770-4.1.

320 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Appendix C

• The embedded power supply of the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller

provides power to the controller and POINTBus backplane. It does not
provide field-side power to the embedded I/O or local expansion modules.

• Not all Class 2/SELV-listed power supplies are certified for use in all
applications, for example, use in nonhazardous and hazardous
environments.

Before installing an external power supply, consult all specification and

certification information to verify that you are using an acceptable external
power supply.

• Only for example purposes, this section describes how to use a 1606-
XLE120E, NEC Class 2 switched-mode power supply. The exact steps for
other external power supplies can vary from the steps that are described
here.

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

Series B L1 CompactLogix 5370 controllers can also be connected to power as
instructed in this procedure.

1. Verify that the external 24V DC power source is not powered.

2. Mount the external 24V DC power source on a DIN rail.

The external 24V DC power source can be installed on the same DIN rail
as the controller or a separate DIN rail.

3. Connect wires to the 24V DC+ and 24V DC- connections on the external
24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 321

Appendix C Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

4. Pull the removable connector off the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

5. Connect the wire that is connected to the 24V DC+ terminal on the
external 24V DC power source to the VDC+ terminal, that is, the top
terminal, on the removable connector.

6. Connect the wire that is connected to the 24V DC- terminal on the
external 24V DC power source to the VDC- terminal, that is, the terminal
that is second from the top, on the removable connector.

322 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Appendix C

IMPORTANT If your application requires a power control device, for example, a

switch or relay, between the external 24V DC power source and the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller to control when the controller is
powered, you must install the power control device at the VDC+
terminal on the removable connector.
If you install the power control device at the VDC- terminal, the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller can have problems powering up or
powering down properly.

7. Plug the removable connector back into the controller.

8. Secure the removable connector in place.

9. Turn on power to the external 24V DC power source.

The following graphic shows an external 24V DC power source that is connected
to a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 323

Appendix C Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

CompactLogix 5370 L1, Complete these steps to connect field power to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 series
A controller. Series B L1 CompactLogix 5370 controllers can also be connected
Series A, Controller Field to field power as instructed in this procedure.
Power to I/O Devices
Connection 1. Verify that the separate external 24V DC power source that powers the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller is not powered.
2. Verify that the external 24V DC power source that is connected to the
FP+ and FP- terminals is not powered.
3. Mount the external power supply that connects to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on a DIN rail.

The external power supply can be installed on the same DIN rail as the
controller or a separate DIN rail.

4. Connect wires to the appropriate + and - connections on the external

24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

5. Pull the removable connector off of the CompactLogix 5370 L1

controller.
Wires connected between external 24V DC
power source and VDC+ and VDC-
terminals on the removable connector.

324 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Appendix C

6. Connect the wire that is connected to the + terminal on the external 24V
DC power source to the FP+ terminal, that is, the fourth terminal from
the top, on the removable connector.

7. Connect the wire that is connected to the - terminal on the external 24V
DC power source to the FP- terminal, that is the fifth terminal from the
top, on the removable connector.

8. Plug the removable connector into the controller.

9. Secure the removable connector in place.

10. Turn on power to the separate external 24V DC power source connected
to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals of the removable connector.
11. Turn on power to the external 24V DC power source connected to the
FP+ and FP- terminals of the removable connector.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 325

Appendix C Connect Power to the Series A L1 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

The following graphic shows separate external 24V DC power supplies

connected to the VDC+/VDC- and FP+/FP- terminals on the removable
connector, respectively.

VDC Power Supply

IMPORTANT: No wires are

Fuse connected to the NC terminal.

FP Power Supply

IMPORTANT Install a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent protection of 4…6 A @

52.5…68.25 A2t in line between the incoming power and the FP+ terminal.

326 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Appendix D

History of Changes

Changes to the Manual With the availability of new controllers, modules, applications, and
programming software features, this manual has been revised to include updated
information. This appendix briefly summarizes changes that have been made with
previous revisions of this manual.

IMPORTANT This appendix does not list the changes that have been implemented with this
revision of the publication.
For a list of changes made in this revision of the publication, see Summary of
Changes on page 9.

Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have
been made across multiple revisions. This can be especially useful if you are
deciding to upgrade your hardware or software that is based on information
added with previous revisions of this manual.

This table lists the publication revision, publication date, and changes that are
made with the revision.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 327

Appendix D History of Changes

Table 46 - History of Changes

Publication Revision and Date Topic
1769-UM021D-EN-P, December 2012 Updated embedded input point wiring diagrams on a CompactLogix 5370
L1 controller
Updated embedded output point wiring diagrams on a CompactLogix 5370
L1 controller
Use the Event Task
Addition of Develop Applications chapter
Addition of History of Changes appendix
1769-UM021C-EN-P, May 2012 Added the description of CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, including the
following content:
• Installing the controller
• Control system components
• Controller functionality
• Example system configurations on an EtherNet/IP network
• Example system configurations on a DeviceNet network
• Using I/O modules with the controller 169
• Motion support with the 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller
• EtherNet/IP network connection specifications
1769-UM021B-EN-P, February 2012 Removed the descriptions of the I/O Event Task and its use with the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers.

In RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx, you can configure the I/O Event
Task for your CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller’s project. However, the task
will never be triggered because the functionality has been disabled in the
controller.

328 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Index

Numerics CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers

1734 POINT I/O modules 151-187 connecting power 30-34, 319-326
connections to I/O modules 181
BUS OFF detection and recovery 187 DIN rail use 24
configure 179-184 direct connections 181
monitor faults 184 embedded I/O module 19
removal and insertion under power 171 wiring diagrams 160
requested packet interval 172 embedded power supply 18, 321
select 151 EtherNet/IP network
using as local expansion modules with Quality of Service technology 142
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers socket interface 138-142
19 topologies 132-136
validate layout 170-174 example EtherNet/IP network system
1769 Compact I/O modules 241-265 configuration 122
calculate system power consumption 249- grounding 24, 27
251 I/O modules 151-187
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 62 installation 15-36
configure 229-232, 257-263 grounding 27
connections 232, 258 minimum spacing 25
end cap detection 240, 265 mounting 24-26
local banks available with CompactLogix 5370 SD card 22-23
L3 controllers 62 system dimensions 26
monitor faults 238, 264 integrated motion over an EtherNet/IP
requested packet interval 223, 231, 246, 258 network 289-300
select 189, 241 local expansion modules 19
using as local expansion modules with BUS OFF detection and recovery 187
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers removal and insertion under power 171
40 minimum spacing 25
validate layout 246-254 mounting 24-26
1769 Compact I/O power supplies networks
calculate system power consumption 249- EtherNet/IP network connection 36
251 USB connection 35
1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner module 145 parts 21
1784-SD1 and 1784-SD2 cards 21, 41 place I/O modules 174
rack-optimized connections 181
installation
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22- select I/O modules 151
selecting operating mode 113-114
23
status indicators 309-313
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42-
system components 18, 118
43
system dimensions 26
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 65-
wiring diagrams 160
66 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers
connecting power 53-56
A connections to I/O modules 232
DeviceNet network
additional resources 12 using 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner
Add-On Instructions module 145
in project 279 DIN rail use 44, 50
application direct connections 232
elements 267 embedded I/O module 40
AutoFlash 100 embedded power supply 40, 53
EtherNet/IP network
load firmware 110-112
Quality of Service technology 142
socket interface 138-142
B topologies 132-136
example DeviceNet network system
BOOTP server 79 configuration 124, 144
set IP address 83-86 example EtherNet/IP network system
configuration 123
grounding 44, 50
C installation 37-58
grounding 50
communicate
minimum spacing 45
over networks 127-145 mounting 44-45, 49

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 329

Index

SD card 42-43 distance rating 62, 73, 146-149

system dimensions 45 rack-optimized connections 258
integrated motion over an EtherNet/IP select I/O modules 241
network 289-300 selecting operating mode 113-114
local expansion modules 40 status indicators 309-313
minimum spacing 45 system components 62, 118
mounting 44-45, 49 system dimensions 72
networks configure
DeviceNet 143-145 I/O modules
EtherNet/IP network connection 58 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L1 con-
USB connection 57 trollers 179-184
parts 41 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L2 con-
power supply trollers 229-232
distance rating 146-149 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L3 con-
rack-optimized connections 232 trollers 257-263
select I/O modules 189 system overhead time slice 286
selecting operating mode 113-114 connections
status indicators 309-313 direct
system components 40, 118 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 181
system dimensions 45 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 232
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 258
available local I/O banks 62 rack-optimized
calculate system power consumption 249- CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 181
251 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 232
connecting power 69 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 258
connections to I/O modules 258 to I/O modules
DeviceNet network CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 181
using 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 232
module 145 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 258
DIN rail use 75 continuous task 270
direct connections 258 ControlFLASH utility 79, 100
EtherNet/IP network
Quality of Service technology 142 load firmware 105-108
socket interface 138-142 controller
topologies 132-136 monitor
example DeviceNet network system connections 282
configuration 124, 144 program 272
example EtherNet/IP network system routine 274
configuration 123 tags 275
grounding 73 tasks 268
I/O modules 241-265 current capacity
installation 59-78 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 150
grounding 73
minimum spacing 71
mounting 73 D
SD card 65-66 develop
system dimensions 72
integrated motion over an EtherNet/IP applications 267
network 289-300 device-level ring topology 78
local 1769 Compact I/O modules 62 DeviceNet network
removal and insertion under power 67 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner module 145
minimum spacing 71 DHCP server 79
mounting 70-73 set IP address 89
networks DIN rail
DeviceNet 143-145 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 24
EtherNet/IP network connection 77 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44, 50
USB connection 76 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 75
parts 64 direct connections
power supply
current capacity 150 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 181
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 232
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 258
distance rating
power supply
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 62,
73

330 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Index

E via ControlFLASH utility 105-108

via SD card 112
elements
control application 267
embedded I/O module G
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 19 grounding
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 40
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 24, 27
wiring diagrams 160
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44, 50
embedded power supply
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 73
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 321 GSV
calculate system power consumption fault code 283
174, 225
monitor
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 53
connection 283
enclosures
minimum spacing
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 25 I
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45
system dimensions I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 26 calculate system power consumption
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 174
EtherNet/IP network CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 225
available network topologies 36, 58, 78 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 249-
change IP address 96-99 251
via Logix Designer application 98-99 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 151-187
via RSLinx Classic software 97 BUS OFF detection and recovery 187
via SD card 99 local expansion modules 166
communication 127-137 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 189-240
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L1 local expansion modules 220
controllers 36 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 241-265
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L2 local 1769 Compact I/O modules 62
controllers 58 configure
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L3 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L1 con-
controllers 77 trollers 179-184
example configurations 122-123 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L2 con-
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP trollers 229-232
network 120, 289-300 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L3 con-
overview 127-137 trollers 257-263
Quality of Service technology 142 connections
set IP address 81-95 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 181
via BOOTP server 83-86 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 232
via DHCP server 89 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 258
via Logix Designer application 92-94 embedded I/O module on CompactLogix 5370
via RSLinx Classic software 90-91 L1 controllers 19
via SD card 95 embedded I/O module on CompactLogix 5370
socket interface 138-142 L2 controllers 40
topologies 132-137 end cap detection
device-level ring 132 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 240
linear 132, 135 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 265
star 136 monitor faults
event task 175-178, 270 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 184
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 238
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 264
F place
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 174
fault code requested packet interval 231, 258
use GSV to get 283 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 172,
faults 180
monitor I/O module faults CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 223
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 184 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 246
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 238 select
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 264 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 151
firmware CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 189
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 241
download 100-103
validate layout
load 100-112
1734 POINT I/O modules 170-174
via AutoFlash 110-112
1769 Compact I/O modules 223-228,

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 331

Index

246-254 via Logix Designer application 98-99

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 170- via RSLinx Classic software 97
174 via SD card 99
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 223- set 81-95
228 via BOOTP server 83-86
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 246- via DHCP server 89
254 via Logix Designer application 92-94
installation via RSLinx Classic software 90-91
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 15-36 via SD card 95
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 37-58
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 59-78
DIN rail L
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 24 linear network topology 78
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44, local 1769 Compact I/O modules
50
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 75 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 62
grounding local expansion modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 27 1734 POINT I/O modules 19
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 50 1769 Compact I/O modules 40
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 73 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 19
local 1769 Compact I/O modules CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 40
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 242 local I/O banks
minimum spacing CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 62
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 25 Logix Designer application
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45 AutoFlash 100
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 71 change IP address 98-99
mounting configure I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 24- for use with CompactLogix 5370 L1 con-
26 trollers 179-184
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44- for use with CompactLogix 5370 L2 con-
45, 49 trollers 229-232
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 70- for use with CompactLogix 5370 L3 con-
73 trollers 257-263
panel mounting Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 49 network 289-300
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 73 load a project to an SD card 307-308
power supply connections to CompactLogix set IP address 92-94
5370 L1 controllers 30-34, 319- store a project to an SD card 304-306
326 using event task 175-178
power supply connections to CompactLogix
5370 L2 controllers 53-56
required software tasks 79-114 M
SD card
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22- memory storage
23 SD cards 21, 41
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42- minimum spacing
43 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 25
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 65- CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45
66 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 71
system dimensions mounting
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 26 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 24-26
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44-45, 49
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 72 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 70-73
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP
network 120, 289-300
configure 293-296 N
drive limits 291 networks
example configuration DeviceNet 143-145
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 299 example CompactLogix 5370 L2 con-
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 300 troller system configuration 124,
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 297 144
supported axes 290 example CompactLogix 5370 L3 con-
time synchronization 292 troller system configuration 124
IP address 79 EtherNet/IP
change 96-99 change IP address via Logix Designer

332 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

 Index

application 98-99 project

change IP address via RSLinx Classic elements 267
software 97
change IP address via SD card 99
example configurations 122-123 Q
network connection for CompactLogix
5370 L1 controllers 36 Quality of Service technology 142
network connection for CompactLogix
5370 L2 controllers 58
network connection for CompactLogix R
5370 L3 controllers 77 rack-optimized connections
Quality of Service technology 142 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 181
set IP address via BOOTP server 83-86 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 232
set IP address via DHCP server 89 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 258
set IP address via Logix Designer appli- removal and insertion under power
cation 92-94
set IP address via RSLinx Classic soft- local 1769 Compact I/O modules
ware 90-91 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 67
set IP address via SD card 95 local expansion modules
socket interface 138-142 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 171
overviews 127-145 requested packet interval
USB CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 172, 180
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L1 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 223, 231
controllers 35 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 246, 258
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L2 routine
controllers 57 in project 274
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L3 RSLinx Classic software 79, 143
controllers 76 change IP address 97
set IP address 90-91
RSLogix 5000 software 79, 143
O RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 79, 143
operating mode
selecting 113-114
S
sample projects 287
P scheduled
panel mounting program 273
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 49 SD card 100, 301-308
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 73 change IP address 99
periodic task 270 installation
power supply CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22-
connections to CompactLogix 5370 L1 23
controllers 30-34, 319-326 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42-
connections to CompactLogix 5370 L2 43
controllers 53-56 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 65-
connections to CompactLogix 5370 L3 66
controllers 69 load a project 307-308
current capacity load firmware 112
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems set IP address 95
150 store a project 304-306
distance rating 146-149 socket interface 138-142
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 73 software
embedded power supply with CompactLogix BOOTP 79
5370 L1 controllers 18, 321 set IP address 83-86
embedded power supply with CompactLogix DHCP 79
5370 L2 controllers 40, 53 set IP address 89
priority Logix Designer application
task 271 AutoFlash 100
program required installation tasks 79-114
in project 272 RSLinx Classic 79, 143
scheduled 273 change IP address 97
system overhead time slice 285
unscheduled 273
programming languages 278

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015 333

Index

set IP address 90-91 U

RSLogix 5000 79, 143
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 79, 143 unscheduled
Studio 5000 environment 79, 143 program 273
star network topology 78 USB cable
status CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 35
monitor CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 57
connections 282 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 76
status indicators 309-313
Studio 5000 environment 79, 143 V
system assembly
calculate system power consumption validate I/O modules layout
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 174, 1734 POINT I/O modules 170-174
225 1769 Compact I/O modules 223-228, 246-
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 249- 254
251
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers
select I/O modules 241 W
place I/O modules wiring diagrams
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 174 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 160
select I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 151
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 189
validate I/O modules layout
1734 POINT I/O modules 170-174
1769 Compact I/O modules 223-228
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 170-
174
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 223-
228
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 246-
254
system components
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 18, 118
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 40, 118
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 62, 118
system dimensions
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 26
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 72
system overhead time slice 285
configure 286
system power consumption
calculate
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 174,
225
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 249-
251

T
tag
in project 275
task
continuous 270
event 175-178, 270
in project 268
periodic 270
priority 271
time slice 285

334 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to
software service packs. You can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software
updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.

In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more
information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local
Rockwell Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

Publication 1769-UM021F-EN-P - April 2015

Supersedes Publication 1769-UM021E-EN-P - November 2014 Copyright © 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.